WO2019021622A1 - Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method - Google Patents

Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019021622A1
WO2019021622A1 PCT/JP2018/020842 JP2018020842W WO2019021622A1 WO 2019021622 A1 WO2019021622 A1 WO 2019021622A1 JP 2018020842 W JP2018020842 W JP 2018020842W WO 2019021622 A1 WO2019021622 A1 WO 2019021622A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
photosensitive resin
group
acid
resin composition
pattern
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/020842
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
山田 悟
後藤 英範
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to CN201880049839.0A priority Critical patent/CN110998441A/en
Priority to JP2019532411A priority patent/JP6808045B2/en
Publication of WO2019021622A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019021622A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F120/00Homopolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride, ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
    • C08F120/02Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms; Derivatives thereof
    • C08F120/10Esters
    • C08F120/26Esters containing oxygen in addition to the carboxy oxygen
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a photosensitive resin composition, a photosensitive transfer material, a method of manufacturing a circuit wiring, and a method of manufacturing a touch panel.
  • a display device organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, liquid crystal display device, etc.
  • a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device
  • an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visible portion, wiring of peripheral wiring portion and extraction wiring portion And the like are provided inside the touch panel.
  • a layer of a photosensitive resin composition provided on an arbitrary substrate using a photosensitive transfer material since the number of steps for obtaining a required pattern shape is small.
  • a method of developing after exposure through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
  • Problem to be solved by one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a photosensitive resin composition which is excellent in sensitivity and excellent in visibility of an exposed area and an unexposed area.
  • another problem to be solved by another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a photosensitive transfer material using the above photosensitive resin composition, a method of producing a circuit wiring, or a method of producing a touch panel. .
  • Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
  • a polymer containing a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, a photoacid generator, and a compound having a pKa of less than 4.5 of a conjugated acid or which does not form a conjugated acid A photosensitive resin composition comprising: a latent dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm or more in a wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development.
  • the photosensitive resin composition as described in said ⁇ 1> whose said maximal absorption wavelength in ⁇ 2> said latent pigment is 550 nm or more.
  • ⁇ 3> The photosensitive resin composition according to ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2>, wherein the latent dye is a latent dye that develops a color by an acid generated from the photoacid generator.
  • the acid generated from the photoacid generator is at least one acid selected from the group consisting of phosphoric acid and sulfonic acid.
  • Resin composition The photosensitive resin composition as described in said ⁇ 4> whose acid generated from ⁇ 5> said photo-acid generator is a sulfonic acid represented by following formula S1 or Formula S2.
  • R S represents an alkyl group
  • L S represents an alkylene group having 2 or more carbon atoms
  • ns represents 0 or 1
  • X S are each independently, represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group
  • ms represents an integer of 0-5.
  • ⁇ 6> The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of the above ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, wherein the pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator is -4.0 or more.
  • ⁇ 7> The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of the above ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, wherein the pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator is 4.0 or less.
  • ⁇ 8> The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of the above ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>, which further contains a basic compound.
  • the photosensitive resin composition as described in any one of said ⁇ 1>- ⁇ 8> which further contains a ⁇ 9> solvent.
  • ⁇ 10> The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of the above ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 9>, wherein the latent dye is a compound represented by the following formula I:
  • Ar 1C and Ar 2C each independently represent an aromatic group
  • X C represents C
  • S or S O
  • R 1C to R 4C each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or one Represents a valent organic group.
  • the structural unit having a group in which the above carboxylic acid group is protected by an acid decomposable group is a structural unit represented by the following formula II described in any one of the above ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 11> Photosensitive resin composition.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 3 is an alkyl group Or R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X represents a single bond or an arylene group.
  • the photosensitive transfer which has a ⁇ 13> temporary support body and a photosensitive resin layer, and the said photosensitive resin layer contains the photosensitive resin composition as described in any one of said ⁇ 1>- ⁇ 12>. material.
  • the said photosensitive of the said photosensitive transfer material after the process of bonding together The step of exposing the conductive resin layer to a pattern, the step of developing the photosensitive resin layer after the exposing step to form a pattern, and the step of etching the substrate in the area where the pattern is not disposed
  • Method of manufacturing circuit wiring including in order.
  • the said sensitivity of the said photosensitive transfer material after the process of bonding The step of exposing the conductive resin layer to a pattern, the step of developing the photosensitive resin layer after the exposing step to form a pattern, and the step of etching the substrate in the area where the pattern is not disposed
  • a photosensitive resin composition which is excellent in sensitivity and excellent in visibility of an exposed area and an unexposed area.
  • a photosensitive transfer material using the photosensitive resin composition, a method of producing a circuit wiring, or a method of producing a touch panel.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of a layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. It is the schematic which shows an example of the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring for touch panels using the photosensitive transfer material which concerns on this indication.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing a pattern A.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic view showing a pattern B.
  • a numerical range represented using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
  • (meth) acryl represents both or any of acrylic and methacryl
  • (meth) acrylate represents both or any of acrylate and a methacrylate.
  • the amount of each component in the composition is the total of a plurality of corresponding substances present in the composition unless a plurality of substances corresponding to each component are present in the composition. Means quantity.
  • the term "process” is included in the term if the intended purpose of the process is achieved, even if it can not be clearly distinguished from other processes, as well as independent processes.
  • groups (atomic groups) in the present specification notations not describing substitution and non-substitution include those having no substituent and those having a substituent.
  • the "alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • the chemical structural formula in this specification may be described by the simplified structural formula which abbreviate
  • weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure use columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (all are trade names manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) unless otherwise noted.
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure has a polymer having a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, a photoacid generator, and a conjugated acid pKa of less than 4.5 Or a latent dye which is a compound which does not form a conjugate acid and whose maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at color development is 500 nm or more.
  • the photosensitive resin composition used for the resist layer of the dry film resist is required to have visibility of the exposed portion from the viewpoint of confirmation of the exposed portion.
  • an acid-colored leuco dye such as CVL (Crystal Violet lactone) is known.
  • the CVL has three dimethylamino groups in the molecule and is highly basic. Therefore, although color development is possible, in a positive resist using a photoacid generator, the acid necessary for the decomposition of the acid-degradable group is neutralized, so that patterning is difficult or the sensitivity is low. The inventors have found that there is a problem of becoming lower.
  • the inventors of the present invention conducted intensive studies, and as a result, by using the photosensitive resin composition having the above-described configuration, a photosensitive resin which is excellent in sensitivity and excellent in visibility of exposed portions and unexposed portions. It has been found that a composition is obtained. Although the mechanism of expression of the above-mentioned effect is unknown, the sensitivity is sufficiently obtained by using the latent dye which is a compound having a pKa of less than 4.5 of the conjugate acid or which does not form the conjugate acid.
  • the light absorption dye and the unexposed area is excellent because the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development is 500 nm or more, and the carboxylic acid group is protected by an acid degradable group.
  • the present inventors estimate that the sensitivity and the visibility can be compatible by containing a polymer containing a structural unit having
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure is a compound in which the pKa of a conjugate acid is less than 4.5 or does not form a conjugate acid, and the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at color development is 500 nm or more. It contains a dye (hereinafter also referred to as "specific latent dye").
  • the specific latent dye may be a compound that develops color upon exposure or a compound that loses color upon exposure, but from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility, a compound that develops color upon exposure is preferable, and photoacid It is more preferable that it is a latent dye that develops color by an acid generated from a generator.
  • the specific latent dye is a compound having a conjugated acid pKa (also referred to as “pKaH”) of less than 4.5 or not forming a conjugated acid.
  • the pKa of the conjugate acid of the compound in the present invention is the pKa (negative common logarithm of the acid dissociation constant) of the chemical species (conjugate acid) obtained by binding H + to the compound.
  • a compound in which H + is dissociated is more stable than a chemical species (conjugate acid) obtained by binding H + to the specific latent dye that the specific latent dye is a compound that does not form a conjugate acid.
  • the pKa (pKaH) of compounds and the like in the present disclosure shall be calculated using ACD / pka DB ver 8.07 of Advanced Chemistry Development ACD / Labs software Ver 8.0 for Microsoft windows.
  • the pKaH of the specific latent dye is preferably -30 or more, more preferably -10 or more.
  • the specific latent dye has a maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, preferably 550 nm or more from the viewpoint of visibility, more preferably 550 nm to 700 nm, 550 nm More preferably, it is at least 650 nm.
  • the specific latent dye may have only one maximum absorption wavelength, or may have two or more. When the specific latent dye has two or more maximum absorption wavelengths, the maximum absorption wavelength at which the absorbance is the highest among the two or more maximum absorption wavelengths may be 500 nm or more.
  • the method of measuring the maximum absorption wavelength in the present disclosure is to measure the transmission spectrum in the range of 400 nm to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV 3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 25 ° C. under the atmosphere atmosphere. The wavelength at which the light intensity is minimized (maximum absorption wavelength) is measured.
  • Specific latent dyes that develop color upon exposure include, for example, leuco compounds.
  • specific latent dyes which are decolorized by exposure to light include, for example, triphenylmethane dyes, diphenylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes, azomethine dyes, anthraquinone dyes and the like. .
  • a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility.
  • leuco compounds examples include leuco compounds such as triphenylmethanes, spiropyrans, fluorans, diphenylmethanes, rhodamine lactams, indolylphthalides, and leucoauramines. Further, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility, the leuco compound is preferably one in which a lactone ring, sultin ring or sultone ring is ring-opened, and more preferably a leuco compound in which a lactone ring is ring-opened to develop color.
  • leuco compounds such as triphenylmethanes, spiropyrans, fluorans, diphenylmethanes, rhodamine lactams, indolylphthalides, and leucoauramines.
  • the leuco compound is preferably one in which a lactone ring, sultin ring or sultone ring is ring-opened, and more preferably
  • the specific latent dye is preferably a compound represented by the following formula I from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility.
  • Ar 1C and Ar 2C each independently represent an aromatic group
  • X C represents C
  • S or S O
  • R 1C to R 4C each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or one Represents a valent organic group.
  • the aromatic group in Ar 1C and Ar 2C may be an aryl group or a heteroaryl group, and even if it is a monocyclic aromatic group, it is a condensed ring in which two or more rings are condensed. May be Further, Ar 1C and Ar 2C may be combined to form a ring, and from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility, Ar 1C and Ar 2C are preferably combined to form a xanthene ring. The aromatic group in Ar 1C and Ar 2C may have a substituent.
  • substituents examples include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group, a diarylamino group and the like, and a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group and a diarylamino group Is preferred.
  • the alkyl group in the dialkylamino group and the alkylarylamino group is preferably independently an alkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • At least one of the two alkyl groups in the dialkylamino group is preferably an alkyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms. These substituents may be further substituted by a substituent.
  • the total number of carbon atoms in Ar 1C and Ar 2C is independently preferably 4 to 50, more preferably 6 to 40, and still more preferably 10 to 30 from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility. .
  • the monovalent organic group in R 1C to R 4C is preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group or a diarylamino group.
  • the carbon number of each of R 1C to R 4C is preferably independently 0 to 20, and more preferably 0 to 10.
  • R 1C to R 4C are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group, and a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, an alkyl group or an aryl It is more preferably a group, particularly preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the specific latent dyes may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the specific latent dye in the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure is 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility. Is preferably 0.1% by mass to 8% by mass, more preferably 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass, and 1.0% by mass to 3.0% by mass. Is particularly preferred.
  • “solid content” in the photosensitive resin composition means a component excluding the volatile component of the solvent.
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure includes a polymer (also referred to as a “specific polymer”) containing a structural unit (also referred to as “structural unit A”) having a group in which a carboxylic acid group is protected with an acid-degradable group.
  • a polymer also referred to as a “specific polymer”
  • structural unit A also referred to as “structural unit A”
  • the photosensitive resin composition which concerns on this indication may contain the other polymer.
  • the polymer having the structural unit A and the other polymers are collectively referred to as a “polymer component”.
  • the structural unit A having an acid-degradable protected carboxylic acid group in the specific polymer undergoes a deprotection reaction to become a carboxylic acid group by the action of a catalytic amount of an acidic substance generated by exposure. This acid group enables a curing reaction.
  • the preferable aspect of the structural unit A is demonstrated below.
  • the photosensitive resin composition may further contain a polymer other than the polymer having a structural unit having an acid-degradable protected acid group. Moreover, it is preferable that all the polymers contained in the said polymer component are polymers which have a structural unit which has the carboxylic acid group mentioned later at least, respectively. Moreover, the said photosensitive resin composition may further contain polymers other than these.
  • the above-mentioned polymer component in the present disclosure is intended to mean one including other polymers added as needed, unless otherwise stated. In addition, even if it is a high molecular compound, the compound applicable to the plasticizer, the heterocyclic compound, and surfactant which are mentioned later shall not be contained in the said polymer component.
  • the specific polymer is preferably a resin of addition polymerization type, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof.
  • the photosensitive resin composition has a weight having a structural unit A1 represented by the following formula II as the structural unit A as a polymer component from the viewpoint of pattern formability, solubility in a developer and transferability.
  • the polymer component contains a specific polymer having a constituent unit A1 represented by the following formula II as the constituent unit A and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less, as the polymer component, A specific polymer having a structural unit A1 represented by the following formula II as the structural unit A and a structural unit B having a carboxylic acid group described later as a polymer component and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less More preferably,
  • the specific polymer contained in the photosensitive resin composition may be only one type, or two or more types.
  • the polymer component includes a polymer having at least a structural unit A having a group in which a carboxylic acid group is protected by an acid-degradable group.
  • the polymer component contains a polymer having the structural unit A, it is possible to obtain a highly sensitive chemically amplified positive type photosensitive resin layer.
  • groups in which the carboxylic acid group is protected with an acid-degradable group those known as an acid-degradable group can be used without particular limitation.
  • the acid-degradable group a group which is relatively easy to be decomposed by acid (for example, an acetal-based functional group such as an ester group protected by a group represented by formula II described later, tetrahydropyranyl ester group, or tetrahydrofuranyl ester group)
  • an acetal-based functional group such as an ester group protected by a group represented by formula II described later, tetrahydropyranyl ester group, or tetrahydrofuranyl ester group
  • Groups or groups which are relatively difficult to be decomposed by acids eg, tertiary alkyl groups such as tert-butyl ester group, tertiary alkyl carbonate groups such as tert-butyl carbonate group
  • a group having a structure protected in the form of acetal is preferable.
  • the structural unit A having a group in which the carboxylic acid group is protected by an acid-degradable group is preferably a structural unit A1 represented by the following formula II, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 3 is an alkyl group Or R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X represents a single bond or an arylene group.
  • R 1 or R 2 when R 1 or R 2 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 1 or R 2 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferred. Each of R 1 and R 2 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group and the aryl group in R 1 to R 3 may have a substituent.
  • R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and it is preferable that R 1 or R 2 and R 3 are linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • the number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
  • X represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferred.
  • the arylene group may have a substituent.
  • R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint of lowering the Tg of the specific polymer. More specifically, it is preferable that the structural unit whose R 4 in Formula II is a hydrogen atom is 20% by mass or more with respect to the total amount of the structural unit A1 contained in the specific polymer.
  • content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit whose R 4 in Formula II is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit A1 is calculated by 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement according to a conventional method. It can confirm by intensity ratio of peak intensity.
  • NMR 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum
  • structural units A1 represented by the formula II structural units represented by the following formula A2 are more preferable from the viewpoint of further enhancing the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 35 to R 41 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 34 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 35 to R 41 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the constituent unit A contained in the specific polymer may be one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit A in the specific polymer is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass, and more preferably 30% by mass to the total mass of the specific polymer. More preferably, it is 70% by mass.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the specific polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensities calculated from 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
  • the ratio of the structural unit A is preferably 5% by mass to 80% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer component after all the polymer components are decomposed into constituent units (monomer units). It is more preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, still more preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass, and particularly preferably 10% by mass to 30% by mass.
  • the specific polymer preferably contains a structural unit B having a carboxylic acid group.
  • the structural unit B is a structural unit including a protective group, for example, a carboxylic acid group not protected with an acid-degradable group, that is, a carboxylic acid group having no protective group.
  • the introduction of a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group into a specific polymer can be carried out by copolymerizing a monomer having a carboxylic acid group.
  • the structural unit containing a carboxylic acid group which is the structural unit B, is a structural unit derived from styrene or a structural unit obtained by substituting a carboxylic acid group for a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, or derived from (meth) acrylic acid It is more preferable that it is a structural unit.
  • the constituent unit B contained in the specific polymer may be only one type or two or more types.
  • the specific polymer preferably contains 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass of a structural unit (structural unit B) having a carboxylic acid group based on the total mass of the specific polymer, and is preferably 0.5% by mass to 15% by mass It is more preferable to include, and it is further preferable to include 1% by mass to 10% by mass. Within the above range, pattern formability becomes better.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the specific polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensities calculated from 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
  • composition unit C other structural units (hereinafter, may be referred to as structural unit C) other than the structural unit A and the structural unit B described above. You may include in the range.
  • a monomer which forms the structural unit C For example, Styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diester , Bicyclo unsaturated compound, maleimide compound, unsaturated aromatic compound, conjugated diene compound, unsaturated monocarboxylic acid, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydride, group having aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other unsaturated Saturated compounds can be mentioned.
  • the Tg of the specific polymer can be easily adjusted to 90 ° C. or less.
  • the specific polymer may contain only one type of the structural unit C, or may contain two or more types.
  • structural unit C is styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinyl benzoate, ethyl vinyl benzoate, (meth) Methyl acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) Examples thereof include structural units formed by polymerizing benzyl acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, or ethylene glycol monoacetoacetate mono (meth) acrylate.
  • a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical properties of the transfer material to be obtained.
  • a monomer which forms these structural units styrene, tert- butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, alpha-methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, And benzyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
  • structural units derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate are preferably mentioned.
  • (meth) acrylic-acid alkylester is preferable in the adhesive viewpoint, for example.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • Specific examples thereof include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
  • 70 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the total mass of a specific polymer, as for content of the structural unit C, 60 mass% or less is more preferable, and 50 mass% or less is still more preferable.
  • the lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and the adhesion of the photosensitive resin layer formed of the photosensitive resin composition are further improved.
  • the specific polymer also includes a constituent unit having an ester of an acid group in the above-mentioned constituent unit B as the constituent unit C, and a viewpoint of optimizing the solubility in a developer and physical properties of the photosensitive resin layer described later.
  • the specific polymer preferably contains, as the structural unit B, a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group, and further preferably contains a structural unit C containing a carboxylic acid ester group as a copolymerization component, for example, (meth) acrylic acid More preferred is a polymer containing the structural unit B derived from and a structural unit (c) derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate or n-butyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the specific polymer in this indication is 90 degrees C or less.
  • the photosensitive resin layer formed of the photosensitive resin composition has high adhesion and is more excellent in transferability.
  • the Tg is more preferably 60 ° C. or less, still more preferably 40 ° C. or less.
  • the lower limit value of the above Tg is not particularly limited, but is preferably ⁇ 20 ° C. or more, more preferably ⁇ 10 ° C. or more.
  • the Tg of the specific polymer is ⁇ 20 ° C.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the entire polymer component in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or less, more preferably 60 ° C. or less, and 40 ° C. or less from the viewpoint of transferability. Is more preferred.
  • the glass transition temperature of the polymer can be measured using differential scanning calorimetry (DSC).
  • DSC differential scanning calorimetry
  • the specific measurement method was performed in accordance with the method described in JIS K 7121 (1987) or JIS K 6240 (2011).
  • the glass transition temperature in the present specification uses an extrapolated glass transition start temperature (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Tig). The method of measuring the glass transition temperature will be described more specifically.
  • Tig extrapolated glass transition start temperature
  • the temperature is kept at about 50 ° C. lower than the expected polymer Tg until the device is stabilized, and then the heating rate: 20 ° C./min, and the temperature is about 30 Heat to a high temperature and draw a DTA curve or a DSC curve.
  • Extrapolation glass transition start temperature that is, the glass transition temperature Tg in the present specification, is a straight line extending the baseline on the low temperature side in the DTA curve or DSC curve to the high temperature side, and the step change portion of the glass transition It is determined as the temperature at the point of intersection with the tangent drawn at the point where the slope of the curve is at a maximum.
  • the FOX formula is used as a guideline from the Tg of the homopolymer of each constitutional unit of the target polymer and the mass ratio of each constitutional unit It is possible to control the Tg of the target specific polymer.
  • the Tg of the homopolymer of the first constitutional unit contained in the polymer is Tg1
  • the mass fraction of the copolymer of the first constitutional unit is W1
  • the Tg of the homopolymer of the second constitutional unit Is Tg2 and the mass fraction of the copolymer of the second structural unit is W2
  • the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is It is possible to estimate according to the equation.
  • FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
  • the type and mass fraction of each structural unit contained in the copolymer can be adjusted using the above-described FOX formula to obtain a copolymer having a desired Tg.
  • the molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of weight average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is 60,000 or less, the melt viscosity of the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer material described later is suppressed low, and when bonding to the substrate, the temperature is low (for example, 130 ° C. or less). Bonding can be realized.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, more preferably 3,000 to 50,000, and still more preferably 10,000 to 30,000. preferable.
  • the weight average molecular weight of a polymer can be measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and various commercially available apparatuses can be used as a measuring apparatus, and the contents of the apparatus and the measuring technique It is known to those skilled in the art.
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • HLC registered trademark
  • GPC manufactured by Tosoh Corp.
  • TSKgel registered trademark
  • Super HZM-M (4) as a column. .6 mm ID x 15 cm, Tosoh Corp. product, Super HZ 4000 (4.6 mm ID x 15 cm, Tosoh Corp.
  • the standard curve is the "standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corp .: “F-40", “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, " It can be prepared using any of the seven samples of A-2500 “and” A-1000 ".
  • the ratio (dispersion degree) of the number average molecular weight to the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, and more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
  • the method for producing the specific polymer is not particularly limited, but one example is a polymerizable monomer for forming the structural unit A1 represented by the formula II, a structural unit B having a carboxylic acid group Synthesis by polymerization using a polymerization initiator in a solvent containing a polymerizable monomer for forming, and, if necessary, a polymerizable monomer for forming another constitutional unit C it can. Moreover, it can also be synthesized by so-called polymer reaction.
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure contains the specific polymer in a proportion of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. Is preferable, and it is more preferable to include 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure has a ratio of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass of the above polymer component with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. It is preferable to contain at a ratio of 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
  • the above-mentioned photosensitive resin composition contains, as a polymer component, a polymer not containing the structural unit A (“the other polymer in a range not impairing the effect of the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure in addition to the specific polymer May be further included).
  • the compounding quantity of another polymer is 50 mass% or less in all the polymer components, and it is more preferable that it is 30 mass% or less More preferably, it is 20% by mass or less.
  • the photosensitive resin composition may contain only one type of other polymer in addition to the specific polymer, or may contain two or more types.
  • polyhydroxystyrene can be used, and commercially available SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (all, manufactured by Sartmar) , ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (all manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and Joncryl 690, Joncryl 678 , Joncryl 67, and Joncryl 586 (above, manufactured by BASF Corp.) can also be used.
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure contains a photoacid generator.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with radiation such as ultraviolet light, far ultraviolet light, X-ray, and charged particle beam.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that responds to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm, and generates an acid, but its chemical structure is not limited.
  • a photoacid generator which does not directly react to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that responds to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more to generate an acid It can be preferably used in combination.
  • the pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably 4.0 or less, more preferably 3.0 or less, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility. The following is more preferable, and -1.0 or less is particularly preferable.
  • the lower limit of the pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator is not particularly limited, but is preferably, for example, -10.0 or more, and from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility, it is more preferably -4.0 or more Preferably, it is -3.5 or more, more preferably -3.0 or more.
  • the acid generated from the photoacid generator is preferably at least one acid selected from the group consisting of phosphoric acid and sulfonic acid from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility, and is sulfonic acid.
  • the sulfonic acid is more preferably a sulfonic acid represented by the following formula S1 or S2.
  • R S represents an alkyl group
  • L S represents an alkylene group having 2 or more carbon atoms
  • ns represents 0 or 1
  • X S are each independently, represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group
  • ms represents an integer of 0-5.
  • the alkyl group in R S may have a substituent.
  • substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, and an aryloxy group.
  • the carbon number of the alkyl group in R 2 S is preferably 1 to 20, and more preferably 2 to 16.
  • L S is preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an ethylene group.
  • X S are each independently preferably an alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a methyl group Is particularly preferred.
  • ms is preferably an integer of 0 to 3, more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 1.
  • the photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound described later and an oxime sulfonate compound described later from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and an oxime sulfonate compound More preferably,
  • nonionic photoacid generators examples include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imidosulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds.
  • the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound in terms of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion.
  • These photoacid generators can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • trichloromethyl-s-triazines and diazomethane derivatives compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP-A-2011-221494 can be exemplified.
  • the oxime sulfonate compound that is, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure, is preferably a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the following formula (B1).
  • R 21 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • * represents a bonding site to another atom or another group.
  • any group may be substituted, and the alkyl group in R 21 may be linear or branched, It may have a ring structure.
  • the permissible substituents are described below.
  • the alkyl group of R 21 is a bridged alicyclic group such as an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and a cycloalkyl group (7, 7-dimethyl-2-oxo norbornyl group, etc.
  • the aryl group of R 21 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group.
  • the aryl group of R 21 may be substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group and a halogen atom.
  • Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts. Among these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
  • the ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
  • a photo-acid generator may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
  • the content of the photoacid generator in the photosensitive resin composition is 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition.
  • 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass is more preferable.
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure preferably further contains a basic compound.
  • a basic compound any one of basic compounds used in a chemical amplification resist can be selected and used.
  • aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids can be mentioned. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraphs [0204] to [0207] of JP-A-2011-221494, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • aliphatic amines for example, trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine
  • examples include ethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, and dicyclohexylmethylamine.
  • aromatic amines include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, and diphenylamine.
  • heterocyclic amine examples include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinic acid amide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, cyclohexylmorpholinoethylthiourea (CMTU), 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene, and 1,8- Diazabishi (B) [5.3.0] -7-unde
  • Examples of quaternary ammonium hydroxides include tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide, tetraethyl ammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-butyl ammonium hydroxide, and tetra-n-hexyl ammonium hydroxide.
  • Examples of quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids include tetramethyl ammonium acetate, tetramethyl ammonium benzoate, tetra-n-butyl ammonium acetate, and tetra-n-butyl ammonium benzoate.
  • the above basic compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass, and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass, with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. More preferable.
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure preferably further contains a solvent.
  • the said photosensitive resin composition is made to contain a solvent once, the viscosity of the photosensitive resin composition is adjusted, and the photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent is apply
  • a well-known solvent can be used as a solvent used for this indication.
  • ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers As a solvent, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol mono alkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol mono alkyl ethers, propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol mono alkyl ether acetates, diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers And diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, and lactones.
  • specific examples of the solvent also include the solvents described in paragraphs [0174] to [0178] of JP-A-2011-221494, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification.
  • Solvents such as nonal, benzyl alcohol, anisole, benzyl acetate, ethyl benzoate, diethyl oxalate, diethyl maleate, ethylene carbonate or propylene carbonate can also be added.
  • the solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the solvents that can be used in the present disclosure may be used alone or in combination of two.
  • two or more solvents for example, combined use of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates and dialkyl ethers, combined use of diacetates and diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, or esters and butylene glycol alkyl ether acetate Preferably used in combination with a class.
  • the solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or more and less than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or more, or a mixture thereof.
  • solvents having a boiling point of 130 ° C. are preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or more and less than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or more, or a mixture thereof.
  • propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.), Propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether (boiling point 131 ° C.) can be exemplified.
  • ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C.), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C.), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C.), dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate (Boiling point 213 ° C), 3-methoxybutyl ether acetate (boiling point 171 ° C), diethylene glycol diethyl ether (boiling point 189 ° C), diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 162 ° C), propylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 190 ° C), diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (Boiling point 220 ° C.), dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 175 ° C.), and 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate (boiling point
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass, and 100 parts by mass to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. More preferably, it is 900 parts by mass.
  • the content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin layer described later is preferably 2% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. It is more preferable that the content is not more than mass%.
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure can contain known additives, as necessary, in addition to the above-described components such as the specific latent dye, the specific polymer, and the photoacid generator.
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure may contain a plasticizer for the purpose of improving the plasticity. It is preferable that the said plasticizer has a smaller weight average molecular weight than a specific polymer.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 500 or more and less than 10,000, more preferably 700 or more and less than 5,000, and still more preferably 800 or more and less than 4,000 from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity.
  • the plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the specific polymer to exhibit plasticity, but from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule.
  • the alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer preferably has the following structure.
  • R is an alkyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms
  • n is an integer of 1 to 50
  • * represents a bonding site to another atom.
  • compound X a compound having an alkyleneoxy group of the above structure
  • compound X a chemical obtained by mixing the compound X, a specific latent dye, a specific polymer, and a photoacid generator
  • the amplification positive photosensitive resin composition does not improve the plasticity as compared with the chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin composition formed without containing the compound X, it does not correspond to the plasticizer in the present disclosure.
  • surfactants that are optionally added do not fall under the plasticizers herein because they are not generally used in amounts that provide plasticity to the photosensitive resin composition.
  • plasticizer although the compound which has the following structure is mentioned, for example, it is not limited to these.
  • the content of the plasticizer is 1% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition from the viewpoint of the adhesion of the photosensitive resin layer formed of the photosensitive resin composition. Is preferable, and 2% by mass to 20% by mass is more preferable.
  • the photosensitive resin composition may contain only one type of plasticizer, or may contain two or more types.
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure can further include a sensitizer.
  • the sensitizer absorbs an actinic ray to be in an electronically excited state.
  • the sensitizer in the electronically excited state comes into contact with the photoacid generator to produce actions such as electron transfer, energy transfer and heat generation.
  • the photoacid generator chemically changes and decomposes to generate an acid. Exposure sensitivity can be improved by containing a sensitizer.
  • anthracene derivatives compounds selected from the group consisting of anthracene derivatives, acridone derivatives, thioxanthone derivatives, coumarin derivatives, base styryl derivatives, and distyryl benzene derivatives are preferable, and anthracene derivatives are more preferable.
  • anthracene derivative anthracene, 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene, 9,10-dichloroanthracene, 2-ethyl-9,10-dimethoxyanthracene, 9-hydroxymethylanthracene, 9-bromoanthracene, 9-chloroanthracene, 9 10-dibromoanthracene, 2-ethylanthracene or 9,10-dimethoxyanthracene is preferred.
  • sensitizer examples include the compounds described in paragraph 0139 to paragraph 0141 of WO 2015/093271.
  • the content of the sensitizer is preferably 0% by mass to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. .
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure can contain a heterocyclic compound.
  • a heterocyclic compound there is no particular limitation on the heterocyclic compound in the present disclosure.
  • a compound having an epoxy group or an oxetanyl group in the molecule described below an alkoxymethyl group-containing heterocyclic compound, various cyclic ethers, oxygen-containing monomers such as cyclic esters (lactones), nitrogen-containing monomers such as cyclic amines and oxazolines
  • heterocyclic monomers having d electrons such as silicon, sulfur and phosphorus can be added.
  • the content of the heterocyclic compound in the photosensitive resin composition is 0.01% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. Is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, and more preferably 1% by mass to 5% by mass. It is preferable in the viewpoint of adhesiveness and etching tolerance as it is the said range.
  • the heterocyclic compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Specific examples of the compound having an epoxy group in the molecule include bisphenol A epoxy resin, bisphenol F epoxy resin, phenol novolac epoxy resin, cresol novolac epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy resin and the like.
  • bisphenol A epoxy resin bisphenol F epoxy resin, phenol novolac epoxy resin and aliphatic epoxy resin are more preferable, and aliphatic epoxy resin is particularly preferable.
  • the compound having an oxetanyl group in the molecule include alonoxetane OXT-201, OXT-211, OXT-212, OXT-213, OXT-121, OXT-221, OX-SQ, PNOX Co., Ltd. can be used.
  • the compound containing an oxetanyl group individually or in mixture with the compound containing an epoxy group.
  • the heterocyclic compound is a compound having an epoxy group from the viewpoint of etching resistance and line width stability of the obtained pattern.
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure may contain an alkoxysilane compound.
  • an alkoxysilane compound a trialkoxysilane compound is mentioned preferably.
  • the alkoxysilane compound for example, ⁇ -aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyl alkyldialkoxysilane, ⁇ -methacryloxypropyl Trialkoxysilane, ⁇ -methacryloxypropyl alkyldialkoxysilane, ⁇ -chloropropyltrialkoxysilane, ⁇ -mercaptopropyltrialkoxysilane, ⁇ - (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrialkoxysilane, vinyltrialkoxysilane It can be mentioned.
  • ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane and ⁇ -methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane are more preferable, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane is more preferable, and 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane is particularly preferable. preferable.
  • the content of the alkoxysilane compound is preferably 0.1% by mass to 30% by mass, and more preferably 0.5% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. .
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity.
  • a surfactant any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
  • nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone surfactants, and fluorine surfactants. .
  • KP made by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Polyflow made by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • F-top made by JEMCO
  • Megafac made by DIC
  • Florard Florard
  • Each series may be mentioned, such as (manufactured by Co., Ltd.), Asahi Guard, Surfron (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox (manufactured by OMNOVA), and SH-8400 (manufactured by Toray Dow Corning).
  • the weight average as polystyrene conversion measured by the gel permeation chromatography at the time of using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent, containing the structural unit A and the structural unit B represented by following formula I-1 as surfactant is used
  • a copolymer having a molecular weight (Mw) of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less can be mentioned as a preferred example.
  • each of R 401 and R 403 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 402 represents a linear alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R 404 represents a hydrogen atom or carbon
  • L represents an alkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms
  • p and q each represent a polymerization percentage
  • p represents a numerical value of 10% to 80% by mass
  • Q represents a numerical value of 20% to 90% by mass
  • r represents an integer of 1 to 18 and s represents an integer of 1 to 10
  • * represents a binding site to another structure Represent.
  • L is preferably a branched alkylene group represented by the following formula (I-2).
  • R 405 in the formula (I-2) represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and in view of compatibility and wettability to the coated surface, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is preferable, and the carbon number is Two or three alkyl groups are more preferred.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer is more preferably 1,500 or more and 5,000 or less.
  • the surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass, with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. It is more preferable that the content be from 01% by mass to 3% by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure includes metal oxide particles, an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid multiplication agent, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a colorant, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a thermal acid generator, Further known additives such as UV absorbers, thickeners and organic or inorganic suspending agents can be added. Preferred embodiments of the other components are described in paragraphs [0165] to [0184] of JP-A-2014-85643, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support and a photosensitive resin layer, and the photosensitive resin layer contains a structural unit having a group in which a carboxylic acid group is protected by an acid-degradable group.
  • FIG. 1 schematically shows an example of the layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • a temporary support 10 In the photosensitive transfer material 100 shown in FIG. 1, a temporary support 10, an intermediate layer 12, a photosensitive resin layer 14, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
  • the photosensitive resin layer 14 is a polymer having a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, a photoacid generator, and a conjugated acid having a pKa of less than 4.5 or a conjugated acid. It is a compound which is not formed, and contains a latent dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm in color development.
  • the polymer which has a structural unit which has an acidic radical protected by an acid degradable group may be called a "specific polymer.”
  • the said photosensitive resin layer is a positive photosensitive resin layer, and may be called a "positive photosensitive resin layer.”
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support.
  • the temporary support is a support that supports the photosensitive resin layer and can be peeled off.
  • the temporary support used in the present disclosure preferably has light transmittance from the viewpoint of being able to expose the photosensitive resin layer through the temporary support when the photosensitive resin layer is subjected to pattern exposure. Having light transmission means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is a viewpoint of improving exposure sensitivity. Therefore, 60% or more is preferable, and 70% or more is more preferable.
  • permeability the method of measuring using Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
  • a resin film is especially preferable from a viewpoint of intensity
  • a resin film a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, a polycarbonate film etc. are mentioned. Among them, biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, and is preferably in the range of 5 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m, and more preferably in the range of 10 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m in terms of handleability, versatility and the like.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is selected according to the material from the viewpoint of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding to a circuit wiring formation substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure step, etc. do it.
  • a photosensitive transfer material has a photosensitive resin layer, and the photosensitive resin layer contains a structural unit having a group in which a carboxylic acid group is protected with an acid-degradable group, a photoacid It contains a generator and a latent dye having a pKa of less than 4.5 of a conjugate acid or a compound which does not form a conjugate acid and having a maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm or more in a wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at color development.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is preferably a layer formed of the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure. Moreover, it is preferable that the said photosensitive resin layer contains the photosensitive resin composition which concerns on this indication.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure is a positive photosensitive resin layer, and is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photo acid generators such as onium salts and oxime sulfonate compounds described later are prepared by using an acid generated in response to actinic radiation (active light) as a catalyst for the deprotection of the protected acid group in the specific polymer.
  • the quantum yield is greater than 1, for example, a large value such as a power of 10, so-called chemical amplification High sensitivity is obtained as a result of
  • a quinonediazide compound is used as a photoacid generator sensitive to actinic radiation, a carboxy group is produced by successive photochemical reactions, but its quantum yield is necessarily 1 or less and does not fall under the chemical amplification type.
  • the latent dyes having a maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development are each a group in which the carboxylic acid group in the photosensitive resin composition is protected with an acid degradable group.
  • the said photosensitive resin layer can preferably contain each component in the said photosensitive resin composition other than the said solvent.
  • the preferable content of each component with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer is a preferable content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition in the photosensitive resin composition. Similar to the amount.
  • the thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m to 20 ⁇ m.
  • the resolution of the pattern obtained when the thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is 20 ⁇ m or less is good, and the thickness of 0.5 ⁇ m or more is preferable from the viewpoint of pattern linearity.
  • the thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is more preferably 0.8 ⁇ m to 15 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 1.0 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m.
  • the photosensitive resin composition for forming a photosensitive resin layer can be prepared by mixing each component and a solvent in a predetermined ratio and using an arbitrary method and stirring and dissolving. For example, after preparing each solution as a solution in which each component is previously dissolved in a solvent, the resulting solution can be mixed at a predetermined ratio to prepare a composition.
  • the composition prepared as described above can also be used after being filtered using a filter with a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m or the like.
  • a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having a photosensitive resin layer on a temporary support can be obtained by applying the photosensitive resin composition to the temporary support and drying.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, or ink jet coating.
  • a photosensitive resin layer can also be apply
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a layer (hereinafter, may be referred to as "other layer”) other than the photosensitive resin layer.
  • Other layers include a contrast enhancement layer, an intermediate layer, a cover film, a thermoplastic resin layer and the like.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can have a contrast enhancement layer in addition to the photosensitive resin layer.
  • a material with a contrast enhancement layer (Contrast Enhancement Layer; CEL) that absorbs significantly to the exposure wavelength before exposure but gradually decreases as it is exposed, that is, the light transmittance increases (photo-decoloring (Referred to as a sex pigment component).
  • CEL contrast Enhancement Layer
  • As the photobleachable dye component diazonium salts, stilbazolium salts, aryl nitroso salts and the like are known.
  • a phenolic resin etc. are used as a film formation component.
  • An intermediate layer can be provided on the photosensitive resin layer for the purpose of applying a plurality of layers and for the purpose of preventing the mixing of the components during storage after application.
  • the intermediate layer the intermediate layers described in paragraphs 0084 to 0087 of JP-A-2005-259138 can be used.
  • the intermediate layer those which are dispersed or dissolved in water or an aqueous alkali solution are preferable.
  • Materials used for the intermediate layer include, for example, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinyl pyrrolidone resins, cellulose resins, acrylamide resins, polyethylene oxide resins, gelatin, vinyl ether resins, polyamide resins, and copolymers of these. Resin is mentioned. Among them, particularly preferred is a combination of polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl pyrrolidone.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can also have, for example, a temporary support, a thermoplastic resin layer, and a photosensitive resin layer in this order. Furthermore, you may have a cover film in order to protect the photosensitive resin layer.
  • Preferred embodiments of the thermoplastic resin layer are described in paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP-A-2014-85643, and preferred embodiments of the other layers are described in paragraphs 0194 to 0-196 of JP-A-2014-85643, respectively. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has another layer such as a thermoplastic resin layer
  • it is produced according to the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material described in paragraph 0094 to paragraph 0098 of JP-A-2006-259138. can do.
  • a solution obtained by dissolving a thermoplastic organic polymer and an additive on a temporary support thermoplastic Coating solution for resin layer
  • thermoplastic Coating solution for resin layer a solution obtained by dissolving a thermoplastic organic polymer and an additive on a temporary support
  • a resin and an additive are added to a solvent which does not dissolve the thermoplastic resin layer on the obtained thermoplastic resin layer.
  • the solution (coating solution for intermediate layer) is applied and dried to laminate the intermediate layer.
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure prepared using a solvent that does not dissolve the intermediate layer is applied onto the formed intermediate layer, and the photosensitive resin composition is laminated to form a photosensitive resin layer.
  • a photosensitive transfer material can be suitably produced.
  • the first embodiment of the method of manufacturing circuit wiring A step of bringing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure into contact with the substrate and bonding the substrate to the substrate (bonding step); Exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the attaching step to a pattern (exposure step); Developing the photosensitive resin layer after the exposing step to form a pattern (developing step); Etching the substrate in the region where the pattern is not disposed (etching step) in this order.
  • the substrate in the first embodiment of the method for producing a circuit wiring may be a substrate provided with a layer such as a desired conductive layer on a substrate such as glass, silicon, or film. According to the first embodiment of the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring, a fine pattern can be formed on the substrate surface.
  • the second embodiment of the method of manufacturing circuit wiring is: A substrate, and a plurality of conductive layers including a first conductive layer and a second conductive layer which are different in constituent material from each other, and the outermost surface layer on the surface of the substrate in order from the surface of the substrate Bonding the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure to the first conductive layer in contact with the substrate on which the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer are laminated.
  • the second embodiment can be referred to WO 2006/190405, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure can be used as a method of manufacturing a circuit wiring for a touch panel or a touch panel display device. The details of each step will be described below based on the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 (a) An example of the bonding step is schematically shown in FIG. 2 (a).
  • the base material 22 and a plurality of conductive layers including the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 which are different in constituent material from each other are provided.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer 14 of 100 is brought into contact with the first conductive layer 24 and attached.
  • bonding of such a substrate for circuit wiring formation and photosensitive transfer material may be called "transfer” or "lamination.”
  • the cover film 16 is provided on the positive photosensitive resin layer 14 of the photosensitive transfer material 100, the cover film 16 is removed from the photosensitive transfer material 100 (positive photosensitive resin layer 14). After that, the positive photosensitive resin layer 14 of the photosensitive transfer material 100 is brought into contact with the first conductive layer 24 and attached. Bonding (transfer) of the photosensitive transfer material onto the first conductive layer is performed by overlapping the positive photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material on the first conductive layer and applying pressure and heat with a roll or the like. Preferably to be performed. For lamination, known laminators such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator capable of further enhancing productivity can be used. When the base material of the circuit wiring formation substrate is a resin film, bonding by roll-to-roll can also be performed.
  • the substrate in which a plurality of conductive layers are laminated on a substrate is preferably a glass substrate or a film substrate, and more preferably a film substrate.
  • the base material is a sheet-like resin composition.
  • a base material is transparent.
  • the refractive index of the substrate is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
  • the substrate may be made of a translucent substrate such as a glass substrate, and for example, tempered glass represented by Gorilla glass of Corning Co., Ltd. can be used.
  • materials used in JP-A-2010-86684, JP-A-2010-152809 and JP-A-2010-257492 can be preferably used.
  • a film substrate it is more preferable to use a substrate having no optical distortion and a substrate having high transparency, and for a specific material, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), Examples include polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose and cycloolefin polymers.
  • Examples of the plurality of conductive layers formed on the substrate include any conductive layer used for general circuit wiring or touch panel wiring.
  • Examples of the material of the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides.
  • As the metal oxide ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), may be mentioned SiO 2 and the like.
  • Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, Mo and the like.
  • At least one of the plurality of conductive layers preferably includes a metal oxide.
  • a conductive layer it is preferable that it is an electrode pattern corresponded to the sensor of the visual recognition part used for an electrostatic capacitance type touch panel, or wiring of a periphery extraction part.
  • Substrate for forming circuit wiring It is a substrate which has a conductive layer on the surface of a substrate.
  • the conductive layer is patterned to form a circuit wiring.
  • a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxides and metals be provided on a film substrate such as PET.
  • the exposure step is performed, and in the second embodiment, the first exposure step is performed.
  • An example of the exposure process (first exposure process) is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer 14 is pattern-exposed through the temporary support 12 of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step.
  • a mask 30 having a predetermined pattern is disposed above the photosensitive transfer material 100 disposed on the first conductive layer 24 (the side opposite to the side in contact with the first conductive layer 24), and then the mask 30 is formed. And exposure to ultraviolet light from above the mask.
  • the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited.
  • a display device for example, a touch panel
  • an input device having a circuit wiring manufactured by the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure and to minimize the area occupied by the extraction wiring
  • at least a part be a thin line of 100 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 70 ⁇ m or less.
  • a light source used for exposure it can be appropriately selected and used as long as it can emit light (for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.) in a wavelength range in which the exposed portion of the photosensitive transfer material can dissolve in the developer. .
  • an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp and the like can be mentioned.
  • the exposure dose is preferably about 5 mJ / cm 2 to 200 mJ / cm 2 , and more preferably about 10 mJ / cm 2 to 100 mJ / cm 2 .
  • PEB Post Exposure Bake
  • the pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
  • the developing step is performed, and in the second embodiment, the first developing step is performed.
  • An example of the developing step (first developing step) is schematically shown in FIG. 2 (c).
  • the developing step after the temporary support 12 is peeled off from the positive photosensitive resin layer 14 after the exposing step (first exposing step), the positive photosensitive after the exposing step (first exposing step)
  • the conductive resin layer 14 is developed to form a first pattern 14A.
  • the developing step is a step of forming a pattern (first pattern) by developing the positive photosensitive resin layer which has been subjected to the pattern exposure.
  • the development of the pattern-exposed positive photosensitive resin layer can be performed using a developer.
  • the developer is not particularly limited as long as the exposed portion of the positive photosensitive resin layer can be removed, and for example, a known developer such as a developer described in JP-A-5-72724 may be used. it can.
  • the developing solution is preferably a developing solution in which the exposed part of the positive photosensitive resin layer has a dissolution type developing behavior.
  • the developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water, a surfactant, and the like.
  • a developing solution preferably used in the present disclosure for example, a developing solution described in paragraph 0194 of WO 2015/093271 can be mentioned.
  • the developing method is not particularly limited, and may be any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development and the like.
  • the exposed portion can be removed by spraying the developing solution onto the positive photosensitive resin layer after exposure by a shower.
  • after development it is preferable to remove a development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like.
  • the temperature of the developing solution is preferably 20.degree. C. to 40.degree.
  • Post-baking heating is preferably performed under an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably performed under an environment of 506.6 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is more preferable to carry out under an environment of 1114.6 kPa or less, and it is particularly preferable to carry out under an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
  • the post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
  • the post-baking time is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 minutes to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes. Post-baking may be performed in an air environment or in a nitrogen-substituted environment.
  • the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure may have other steps such as a post-exposure step.
  • the etching step is performed, and in the second embodiment, the first etching step is performed.
  • An example of the etching step (first etching step) is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the etching step first etching step
  • at least the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 among the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the first pattern 14A is not disposed are etched.
  • the first conductive layer 24A and the second conductive layer 26A having the same pattern are formed.
  • etching can be applied by a known method such as a method described in paragraph 0048 to paragraph 0054 of JP-A-2010-152155 or a method by dry etching such as known plasma etching.
  • etching solution used for wet etching may be appropriately selected from acid type or alkaline type etching solution in accordance with the object of etching.
  • acid type etching solution include aqueous solutions of acidic components such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid and phosphoric acid alone, and mixed aqueous solutions of acidic components and salts of ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, potassium permanganate and the like. Be done.
  • An acidic component may use the component which combined the several acidic component.
  • an aqueous solution of an alkali component alone such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amine, salt of organic amine such as tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide, alkali component and potassium permanganate etc.
  • an alkali component a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
  • the temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or less.
  • the first pattern used as the etching mask (etching pattern) in the present disclosure preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to an acidic and alkaline etching solution in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or less. Therefore, peeling of the positive photosensitive resin layer during the etching process is prevented, and the portion where the positive photosensitive resin layer is not present is selectively etched.
  • a cleaning process and a drying process may be performed as needed in order to prevent contamination of the process line.
  • the cleaning process is performed by, for example, cleaning the substrate with pure water at normal temperature for 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the drying process is performed using an air blow, for example, using an air blow pressure (about 0.1 kg / cm 2 to 5 kg / cm 2 ). Is adjusted appropriately and drying may be performed.
  • a second exposure step is performed.
  • An example of the second exposure step is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the first pattern 14A after the first etching step is subjected to pattern exposure with a pattern different from the first pattern.
  • the second exposure step a portion corresponding to a portion to be removed of at least the first conductive layer in the second developing step described later is exposed to the first pattern remaining on the first conductive layer.
  • the pattern exposure in the second exposure step can apply the same method as the pattern exposure in the first exposure step except that a mask 40 having a different pattern from that of the mask 30 used in the first exposure step is used.
  • the second development step is performed.
  • An example of the second developing step is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the first pattern 14A after the second exposure step is developed to form a second pattern 14B.
  • the development a portion of the first pattern exposed in the second exposure step is removed.
  • the same method as the development in the first development step can be applied.
  • a second exposure step is performed.
  • An example of the second etching step is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the second etching step at least the first conductive layer 24A of the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the second pattern 14B is not disposed is etched.
  • the same method as the etching in the first etching step can be applied except that an etching solution corresponding to the conductive layer to be removed by etching is selected.
  • the second etching step depending on the desired pattern, it is preferable to selectively etch less conductive layers than in the first etching step.
  • the first conductive layer is etched by performing etching using an etching solution that selectively etches only the first conductive layer 24B in the region where the positive photosensitive resin layer is not disposed.
  • the pattern of the second conductive layer can be different from that of the second conductive layer.
  • ⁇ Positive photosensitive resin layer removal process An example of the positive photosensitive resin layer removing step is schematically shown in FIG. After the completion of the second etching process, the second pattern 14B remains on a part of the first conductive layer 24B. If the positive photosensitive resin layer is unnecessary, all the remaining positive photosensitive resin layer 14B may be removed.
  • a substrate having a positive photosensitive resin layer or the like is preferably added to the stripping solution under agitation at preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C.
  • a method of immersion for 1 minute to 30 minutes may be mentioned.
  • an inorganic alkali component such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide or an organic alkali component such as a primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine or a quaternary ammonium salt, And dimethylsulfoxide, N-methyl pyrrolidone or a mixture thereof.
  • a peeling solution may be used to peel off by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method or the like.
  • the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure may include other optional steps.
  • the following processes are mentioned, it is not limited to these processes.
  • the method further includes the step of sticking a light transmitting protective film (not shown) on the first pattern. Good.
  • the first pattern is pattern-exposed through the protective film, and after the second exposure step, the second development step is performed after the protective film is peeled off from the first pattern.
  • the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure can include the step of reducing the visible light reflectance of part or all of the plurality of conductive layers on the substrate.
  • An oxidation process etc. can be mentioned as a process which reduces the visible light reflectance.
  • the visible light reflectance can be reduced by oxidizing copper to copper oxide and blackening the copper.
  • Paragraph 0017-Paragraph 0025 of Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2014-150118 and Paragraph 0041, Paragraph 0042, Paragraph 0048 and Paragraph 0058 of Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-206315.
  • the contents of this publication are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure preferably includes the steps of forming an insulating film on the formed circuit wiring and forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film.
  • the second electrode pattern described above can be formed while being insulated from the first electrode pattern.
  • the method of forming a well-known permanent film can be mentioned.
  • an insulating film with a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having an insulating property.
  • a photosensitive material having conductivity may be used to form a new conductive layer of a desired pattern by photolithography.
  • the case of forming the circuit wiring having two different patterns on the circuit wiring formation substrate provided with the two conductive layers has been described.
  • the number of conductive layers of the substrate to which the manufacturing method is applied is not limited to two, and a combination of the exposure step, the development step, and the etching step described above is used using the circuit wiring formation substrate in which three or more conductive layers are stacked. By carrying out three or more times, three or more conductive layers can be formed in different circuit wiring patterns.
  • the base material has a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces respectively, and the conductive layer formed on both surfaces of the base It is also preferable to form a circuit sequentially or simultaneously. With such a configuration, it is possible to form a touch panel circuit wiring in which the first conductive pattern is formed on one surface of the base and the second conductive pattern is formed on the other surface. Moreover, it is also preferable to form the circuit wiring for touchscreens of such a structure from both surfaces of a base material by roll-to-roll.
  • the circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • a circuit board according to the present disclosure is a substrate having a circuit interconnect manufactured by the method of manufacturing a circuit interconnect according to the present disclosure.
  • the use of the circuit board which concerns on this indication is not limited, For example, it is preferable that it is a circuit board for touch panels.
  • the input device in the present disclosure is preferably a capacitive touch panel.
  • the display device in the present disclosure preferably includes the input device in the present disclosure. Further, the display device in the present disclosure is preferably an image display device such as an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel having at least the circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
  • the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure is a touch panel display device having at least a circuit wiring manufactured by the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel display device having a touch panel according to the present disclosure. It is preferable that the manufacturing method of the touch panel or touch-panel display apparatus which concerns on this indication includes the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication.
  • the step of bonding the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material obtained by the method of manufacturing a photosensitive transfer material in contact with the substrate A step of pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the step, a step of developing the photosensitive resin layer after the step of exposing to form a pattern, and a region where the pattern is not disposed
  • the step of etching the substrate in the following order The details of each step are the same as the details of each step in the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • any known methods such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method may be used.
  • the capacitance method is preferable.
  • a touch panel type a so-called in-cell type (for example, those shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 7 and 8 of JP-A-2012-517051), a so-called on-cell type (for example, JP-A 2013-168125) 19 described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-89102, and those described in FIG. 1 and FIG. 5 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No.
  • the “maximum absorption wavelength” in the present example is the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development.
  • ATHF 2-tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (synthetic product)
  • MATHF 2-tetrahydrofuranyl methacrylate (synthetic product)
  • ATHP tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl acrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • MATHP tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl methacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • MAEVE 1-ethoxyethyl methacrylate (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • TBMA t-butyl methacrylate (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • AA acrylic acid (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • MAA methacrylic acid (manufactured by Tokyo
  • the reaction liquid is filtered after laying in order of KNU ward 200 (aluminum hydroxide adsorbent, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and KYOWARD 1000 (hydrotalcite-based adsorbent, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) in Nutsche.
  • the filtrate was obtained by doing.
  • MEHQ hydroquinone monomethyl ether
  • the solution is concentrated under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. to obtain 140.8 parts of tetrahydrofuran-2-yl acrylate as a colorless oil. Obtained (yield 99.0%).
  • Synthesis Example of Polymer A-10 A polymer synthesized by the same method as the acid-degradable polymer compound PS-2 described in JP-A-2008-64908 has a polymer A-10 (having a group in which the carboxylic acid group is protected by the acid-degradable group) It was set as the polymer which does not contain a unit.
  • B-2 BASF Irgacure PAG-103, the following compounds
  • B-3 Compound having the following structure (synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0210 of JP-A-2014-197155).
  • WPAG-281 (trade name, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • C-1 The same compound as C-1 described above, manufactured by Fukui Yamada Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., maximum absorption wavelength: 576 nm, pKaH: -3.53
  • C-2 The same compound as C-2 described above, manufactured by Chameleon, maximum absorption wavelength: 533 nm, pKaH: no conjugated acid is formed
  • C-3 the same compound as C-3 described above, manufactured by Yamamoto Kasei Co., Ltd.
  • D-2 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • D-3 1,5-Diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • E-1 Megafac F-554 (fluorinated nonionic surfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation)
  • E-2 Megafac F-552 (fluorinated nonionic surfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation)
  • E-3 Megafac F-253 (fluorinated nonionic surfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation)
  • Example 1 to 22 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4 Preparation of Photosensitive Transfer Material
  • the polymer component, the photoacid generator, the basic compound, the surfactant, and the other components were made to have acetic acid so as to obtain the solid content ratio shown in Table 2 below.
  • Dissolve and mix n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone 70/30 (volume%) to a solid content concentration of 14% by mass, filter with a polytetrafluoroethylene filter with a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m, obtain a photosensitive resin composition Obtained.
  • This photosensitive resin composition was dried on a 16 ⁇ m thick polyethylene terephthalate film (hereinafter, also referred to as “PET (A)”) to be a temporary support by using a slit nozzle and having a dry film thickness of 3.0 ⁇ m. It applied so that it might become. Then, it was dried in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes, and finally a polypropylene film (Alfane PK-002, manufactured by Oji F-TEX Co., Ltd.) was press-bonded as a cover film to prepare a photosensitive transfer material.
  • PET (A) polyethylene terephthalate film
  • a copper layer-coated PET substrate was used in which a copper layer was produced by sputtering at a thickness of 200 nm on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 100 ⁇ m.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • ⁇ Sensitivity evaluation> The prepared photosensitive transfer material was subjected to a linear pressure of 0.8 MPa, a linear velocity of 3.0 m / min.
  • the laminate was laminated on a PET substrate with a copper layer under the following lamination conditions.
  • the area where the photosensitive resin layer is in close contact with the copper layer without bubbles or floats is confirmed by visual evaluation at a roll temperature of 90 ° C., and when the above area is less than 95%, the above area is 95% or more The roll temperature was raised until it became and the sample was produced.
  • the prepared photosensitive transfer material was subjected to a linear pressure of 0.8 MPa, a linear velocity of 3.0 m / min.
  • the laminate was laminated on a PET substrate with a copper layer under the following lamination conditions.
  • the area where the photosensitive resin layer is in close contact with the copper layer without bubbles or floats is confirmed by visual evaluation at a roll temperature of 90 ° C., and when the above area is less than 95%, the above area is 95% or more
  • the roll temperature was raised until it became and the sample was produced.
  • a part of the temporary support was light-shielded without peeling, and after exposing the photosensitive resin layer with an extra-high pressure mercury lamp, it was left for 4 hours.
  • the amount of exposure used was the amount of exposure obtained by the above sensitivity evaluation.
  • An optical lens with a magnification of 4 was attached to the tip of a black and white CCD (Charge Coupled Device) camera, and the reflected light intensity of the exposed area and the reflected light intensity of the unexposed area were measured.
  • Reflected light intensity ratio (reflected light intensity of exposed area) / (reflected light intensity of unexposed area) The smaller the value of the reflected light intensity ratio, the better the performance, and the practical level is A to C in the following evaluation criteria.
  • Reading camera pixel count 5 million pixels (2,432 ⁇ 2, 050)
  • Light source D65 light source (International Lighting Commission (CIE) standard light source D65) passed through Fujifilm Corporation Sharp Cut Filter SC-42
  • Reflected light intensity ratio is less than 0.45
  • the prepared photosensitive transfer material was subjected to a linear pressure of 0.8 MPa, a linear velocity of 3.0 m / min.
  • the laminate was laminated on a PET substrate with a copper layer under the following lamination conditions.
  • the area where the photosensitive resin layer is in close contact with the copper layer without bubbles or floats is confirmed by visual evaluation at a roll temperature of 90 ° C., and when the above area is less than 95%, the above area is 95% or more The roll temperature was raised until it became and the sample was produced.
  • the photosensitive resin layer was exposed with an exposure amount obtained by sensitivity evaluation with an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp through a line and space pattern (Duty ratio 1: 1) mask with a line width of 3 ⁇ m to 20 ⁇ m. After standing for 4 hours, the temporary support was peeled off and developed. The development was carried out for 30 seconds by shower development using a 1.0% aqueous sodium carbonate solution at 28 ° C. With the line and space pattern thus obtained, 50 points of the line width are measured for the range of 40 ⁇ m of the longitudinal edge of the pattern in which the line width falls within 7 ⁇ 0.5 ⁇ m, and the standard deviation of the measurement variation is determined , 3 ⁇ was calculated.
  • the unit of the quantity of each component of Table 2 is a mass part.
  • Comparative Example 4 since no sensitivity was obtained, a clean pattern could not be formed and the linearity was "E".
  • the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure was able to achieve both sensitivity and visibility at a high level.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure was capable of transfer to a copper layer.
  • Example 101 Indium tin oxide (ITO) is deposited by sputtering as a conductive layer of the second layer on a 100 ⁇ m-thick PET substrate by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper is vacuum deposited thereon as a conductive layer of the first layer. A film was formed at a thickness of 200 nm to form a circuit formation substrate.
  • the photosensitive transfer material 1 obtained in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.). The contact pattern was exposed using a photomask provided with a pattern (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern A”) shown in FIG.
  • the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually illustrates the alignment alignment frame.
  • the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A.
  • the copper layer is etched using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and then the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching liquid (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with an opening of a pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as “pattern B”) shown in FIG. 4 in a state where alignment is aligned, and development and washing were performed.
  • the gray portion G is a light shielding portion, and the dotted line portion DL virtually illustrates the alignment alignment frame.
  • the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled using a peeling solution (10 mass% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
  • a circuit wiring board was obtained.
  • a microscope there was no peeling or chipping, and it was a beautiful pattern.
  • Example 102 ITO is deposited as a conductive layer of the second layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm on a 100 ⁇ m-thick PET substrate, and copper is deposited thereon by a vacuum evaporation method to a thickness of 200 nm as a conductive layer of the first layer.
  • the film was formed as a circuit formation substrate.
  • the photosensitive transfer material 1 obtained in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.).
  • the photosensitive resin layer was pattern-exposed using a photomask provided with a pattern A shown in FIG. 3 having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support.
  • the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A.
  • the copper layer is etched using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and then the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching liquid (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • substrate with which copper (solid line part SL) and ITO (gray part G) were both drawn by the pattern A was obtained.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Addition Polymer Or Copolymer, Post-Treatments, Or Chemical Modifications (AREA)
  • Manufacturing Of Printed Circuit Boards (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a photosensitive resin composition that comprises: a polymer containing a structural unit having a group obtained by protecting a carboxylic acid group by an acid-decomposable group; a photoacid generator; and a latent pigment which is a compound that has formed therein a conjugate acid having a pKa of less than 4.5 or no conjugate acid, the latent pigment having a local maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm or higher in a wavelength range of 400-780 nm at color development. Also provided are a photosensitive transfer material, a circuit wiring production method, and a touch panel production method that use the abovementioned photosensitive resin composition.

Description

感光性樹脂組成物、感光性転写材料、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, method of manufacturing circuit wiring, and method of manufacturing touch panel
 本開示は、感光性樹脂組成物、感光性転写材料、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法に関する。 The present disclosure relates to a photosensitive resin composition, a photosensitive transfer material, a method of manufacturing a circuit wiring, and a method of manufacturing a touch panel.
 静電容量型入力装置などのタッチパネルを備えた表示装置(有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置及び液晶表示装置など)では、視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン、周辺配線部分及び取り出し配線部分の配線などの導電性層パターンがタッチパネル内部に設けられている。
 一般的にパターン化した層の形成には、必要とするパターン形状を得るための工程数が少ないといったことから、感光性転写材料を用いて任意の基板上に設けた感光性樹脂組成物の層に対して、所望のパターンを有するマスクを介して露光した後に現像する方法が広く使用されている。
In a display device (organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, liquid crystal display device, etc.) provided with a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device, an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visible portion, wiring of peripheral wiring portion and extraction wiring portion And the like are provided inside the touch panel.
In general, for forming a patterned layer, a layer of a photosensitive resin composition provided on an arbitrary substrate using a photosensitive transfer material since the number of steps for obtaining a required pattern shape is small. On the other hand, a method of developing after exposure through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
 また、従来の感光性樹脂組成物としては、特開2008-64908号公報、特開2004-54106号公報、特開2009-3000号公報、又は、特開2002-341544号公報に記載されたものが知られている。 Further, as conventional photosensitive resin compositions, those described in JP-A-2008-64908, JP-A-2004-54106, JP-A-2009-3000, or JP-A-2002-341544. It has been known.
 本発明の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、感度に優れ、露光部及び未露光部の視認性に優れる感光性樹脂組成物を提供することである。
 また、本発明の他の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、上記感光性樹脂組成物を用いた感光性転写材料、回路配線の製造方法、又は、タッチパネルの製造方法を提供することである。
Problem to be solved by one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a photosensitive resin composition which is excellent in sensitivity and excellent in visibility of an exposed area and an unexposed area.
In addition, another problem to be solved by another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a photosensitive transfer material using the above photosensitive resin composition, a method of producing a circuit wiring, or a method of producing a touch panel. .
 上記課題を解決するための手段には、以下の態様が含まれる。
<1> カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体、光酸発生剤、及び、共役酸のpKaが4.5未満又は共役酸を形成しない化合物であり、かつ発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が500nm以上である潜在性色素、を含有する感光性樹脂組成物。
<2> 上記潜在性色素における上記極大吸収波長が、550nm以上である上記<1>に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<3> 上記潜在性色素が、上記光酸発生剤から発生する酸により発色する潜在性色素である上記<1>又は<2>に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<4> 上記光酸発生剤から生じる酸が、リン酸及びスルホン酸よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の酸である上記<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<5> 上記光酸発生剤から発生する酸が、下記式S1又は式S2で表されるスルホン酸である上記<4>に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
<1> A polymer containing a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, a photoacid generator, and a compound having a pKa of less than 4.5 of a conjugated acid or which does not form a conjugated acid A photosensitive resin composition comprising: a latent dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm or more in a wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development.
The photosensitive resin composition as described in said <1> whose said maximal absorption wavelength in <2> said latent pigment is 550 nm or more.
<3> The photosensitive resin composition according to <1> or <2>, wherein the latent dye is a latent dye that develops a color by an acid generated from the photoacid generator.
<4> The photosensitivity according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the acid generated from the photoacid generator is at least one acid selected from the group consisting of phosphoric acid and sulfonic acid. Resin composition.
The photosensitive resin composition as described in said <4> whose acid generated from <5> said photo-acid generator is a sulfonic acid represented by following formula S1 or Formula S2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 式S1及び式S2中、Rは、アルキル基を表し、Lは、炭素数2以上のアルキレン基を表し、nsは0又は1を表し、ただし、Rがハロゲン原子を有するアルキル基である場合はnが1であり、Xはそれぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基又はアリーロキシ基を表し、msは、0~5の整数を表す。 In formulas S1 and S2, R S represents an alkyl group, L S represents an alkylene group having 2 or more carbon atoms, ns represents 0 or 1, provided that R S is an alkyl group having a halogen atom in some cases an n is 1, X S are each independently, represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group, ms represents an integer of 0-5.
<6> 上記光酸発生剤から発生する酸のpKaが、-4.0以上である上記<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<7> 上記光酸発生剤から発生する酸のpKaが、4.0以下である上記<1>~<6>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<8> 塩基性化合物を更に含有する上記<1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<9> 溶剤を更に含有する上記<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<10> 上記潜在性色素が、下記式Iで表される化合物である上記<1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<6> The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of the above <1> to <5>, wherein the pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator is -4.0 or more.
<7> The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of the above <1> to <6>, wherein the pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator is 4.0 or less.
<8> The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of the above <1> to <7>, which further contains a basic compound.
The photosensitive resin composition as described in any one of said <1>-<8> which further contains a <9> solvent.
<10> The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of the above <1> to <9>, wherein the latent dye is a compound represented by the following formula I:
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 式I中、Ar1C及びAr2Cはそれぞれ独立に、芳香族基を表し、XはC、S又はS=Oを表し、R1C~R4Cはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子又は一価の有機基を表す。 In Formula I, Ar 1C and Ar 2C each independently represent an aromatic group, X C represents C, S or S = O, and R 1C to R 4C each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or one Represents a valent organic group.
<11> 上記式IにおけるXが、Cである上記<10>に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<12> 上記カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位が、下記式IIで表される構成単位である上記<1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
The photosensitive resin composition as described in said <10> whose XC in <11> said Formula I is C.
<12> The structural unit having a group in which the above carboxylic acid group is protected by an acid decomposable group is a structural unit represented by the following formula II described in any one of the above <1> to <11> Photosensitive resin composition.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 式II中、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR及びRのいずれか一方が、アルキル基又はアリール基であり、Rはアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R又はRと、Rとが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表す。 In Formula II, R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 3 is an alkyl group Or R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X represents a single bond or an arylene group.
<13> 仮支持体と、感光性樹脂層とを有し、上記感光性樹脂層が、上記<1>~<12>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性樹脂組成物を含む感光性転写材料。
<14> 基板に対し、上記<13>に記載の感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層を上記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、上記露光する工程後の感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む回路配線の製造方法。
<15> 基板に対し、上記<13>に記載の感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層を上記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、上記露光する工程後の感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含むタッチパネルの製造方法。
The photosensitive transfer which has a <13> temporary support body and a photosensitive resin layer, and the said photosensitive resin layer contains the photosensitive resin composition as described in any one of said <1>-<12>. material.
The process of making the said photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material as described in said <13> contact with the said substrate with respect to a <14> board | substrate, and bonding together, The said photosensitive of the said photosensitive transfer material after the process of bonding together The step of exposing the conductive resin layer to a pattern, the step of developing the photosensitive resin layer after the exposing step to form a pattern, and the step of etching the substrate in the area where the pattern is not disposed Method of manufacturing circuit wiring, including in order.
The process which makes the said photosensitive resin layer of photosensitive transfer material as described in said <13> contact the said board | substrate, and it bonds together with respect to a <15> board | substrate, The said sensitivity of the said photosensitive transfer material after the process of bonding The step of exposing the conductive resin layer to a pattern, the step of developing the photosensitive resin layer after the exposing step to form a pattern, and the step of etching the substrate in the area where the pattern is not disposed A method of manufacturing a touch panel, including in order.
 本発明の一実施形態によれば、感度に優れ、露光部及び未露光部の視認性に優れる感光性樹脂組成物を提供することができる。
 また、本発明の他の一実施形態によれば、上記感光性樹脂組成物を用いた感光性転写材料、回路配線の製造方法、又は、タッチパネルの製造方法を提供することができる。
According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a photosensitive resin composition which is excellent in sensitivity and excellent in visibility of an exposed area and an unexposed area.
In addition, according to another embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a photosensitive transfer material using the photosensitive resin composition, a method of producing a circuit wiring, or a method of producing a touch panel.
本開示に係る感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を示す概略図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of a layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. 本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いたタッチパネル用回路配線の製造方法の一例を示す概略図である。It is the schematic which shows an example of the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring for touch panels using the photosensitive transfer material which concerns on this indication. パターンAを示す概略図である。FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing a pattern A. パターンBを示す概略図である。FIG. 7 is a schematic view showing a pattern B.
 以下、本開示の内容について説明する。なお、添付の図面を参照しながら説明するが、符号は省略する場合がある。
 また、本明細書において「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 また、本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリル」はアクリル及びメタクリルの双方、又は、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリレート」はアクリレート及びメタクリレートの双方、又は、いずれかを表す。
 更に、本明細書において組成物中の各成分の量は、組成物中に各成分に該当する物質が複数存在する場合、特に断らない限り、組成物中に存在する該当する複数の物質の合計量を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけでなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であっても工程の所期の目的が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
 また、本明細書における化学構造式は、水素原子を省略した簡略構造式で記載する場合もある。
 本開示において、「質量%」と「重量%」とは同義であり、「質量部」と「重量部」とは同義である。
 また、本開示において、2以上の好ましい態様の組み合わせは、より好ましい態様である。
 また、本開示における重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、特に断りのない限り、TSKgel GMHxL、TSKgel G4000HxL、TSKgel G2000HxL(何れも東ソー(株)製の商品名)のカラムを使用したゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)分析装置により、溶媒THF(テトラヒドロフラン)、示差屈折計により検出し、標準物質としてポリスチレンを用いて換算した分子量である。
The contents of the present disclosure will be described below. Although the description will be made with reference to the attached drawings, the reference numerals may be omitted.
Further, in the present specification, a numerical range represented using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
Moreover, in this specification, "(meth) acryl" represents both or any of acrylic and methacryl, and "(meth) acrylate" represents both or any of acrylate and a methacrylate.
Furthermore, in the present specification, the amount of each component in the composition is the total of a plurality of corresponding substances present in the composition unless a plurality of substances corresponding to each component are present in the composition. Means quantity.
In the present specification, the term "process" is included in the term if the intended purpose of the process is achieved, even if it can not be clearly distinguished from other processes, as well as independent processes.
In the notation of groups (atomic groups) in the present specification, notations not describing substitution and non-substitution include those having no substituent and those having a substituent. For example, the "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
Moreover, the chemical structural formula in this specification may be described by the simplified structural formula which abbreviate | omitted the hydrogen atom.
In the present disclosure, “mass%” and “weight%” are synonymous, and “mass part” and “part by weight” are synonymous.
Also, in the present disclosure, a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
Moreover, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure use columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (all are trade names manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) unless otherwise noted. It is a molecular weight which is detected using a solvent THF (tetrahydrofuran) and a differential refractometer by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer and a polystyrene as a standard substance.
(感光性樹脂組成物)
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体、光酸発生剤、及び、共役酸のpKaが4.5未満又は共役酸を形成しない化合物であり、かつ発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が500nm以上である潜在性色素、を含有する。
(Photosensitive resin composition)
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure has a polymer having a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, a photoacid generator, and a conjugated acid pKa of less than 4.5 Or a latent dye which is a compound which does not form a conjugate acid and whose maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at color development is 500 nm or more.
 ドライフィルムレジストのレジスト層に用いられる感光性樹脂組成物には、露光部分の確認の観点から、露光部分の視認性が求められる。
 一般的な発色剤としては、CVL(クリスタルバイオレットラクトン)等の酸発色型のロイコ色素が知られているが、上記CVLは、分子内に3つジメチルアミノ基があり、塩基性が高い。そのため、発色は可能であるものの、光酸発生剤を使用するポジ型のレジストにおいては、酸分解性基の分解に必要な酸を中和してしまうため、パターニングがしにくかったり、又は感度が低くなるという問題があることを本発明者らは見出した。
 また、ロイコ色素の塩基性を下げ感度を向上させるためには、ロイコ色素からのアミノ基の排除が考えられるが、それにより発色体の極大吸収波長が短波側にシフトし、露光部分の視認性が十分でないという問題があることを本発明者らは見出した。
The photosensitive resin composition used for the resist layer of the dry film resist is required to have visibility of the exposed portion from the viewpoint of confirmation of the exposed portion.
As a general color-developing agent, an acid-colored leuco dye such as CVL (Crystal Violet lactone) is known. The CVL has three dimethylamino groups in the molecule and is highly basic. Therefore, although color development is possible, in a positive resist using a photoacid generator, the acid necessary for the decomposition of the acid-degradable group is neutralized, so that patterning is difficult or the sensitivity is low. The inventors have found that there is a problem of becoming lower.
In addition, in order to lower the basicity of leuco dye and improve the sensitivity, it is conceivable to exclude the amino group from the leuco dye, whereby the maximum absorption wavelength of the color former is shifted to the short wavelength side, and the visibility of the exposed portion The present inventors have found that there is a problem that is not sufficient.
 これらの問題に対して、本発明者らは鋭意検討を重ねた結果、上記構成の感光性樹脂組成物とすることにより、感度に優れ、露光部及び未露光部の視認性に優れる感光性樹脂組成物が得られることを見出した。
 詳細な上記効果の発現機構は不明であるが、潜在性色素が共役酸のpKaが4.5未満又は共役酸を形成しない化合物であるものを用いることにより、感度が十分得られるとともに、上記潜在性色素における発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が500nm以上であることにより、露光部及び未露光部の視認性も優れ、また、カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体を含有することにより、感度及び視認性を両立できると本発明者らは推定している。
With respect to these problems, the inventors of the present invention conducted intensive studies, and as a result, by using the photosensitive resin composition having the above-described configuration, a photosensitive resin which is excellent in sensitivity and excellent in visibility of exposed portions and unexposed portions. It has been found that a composition is obtained.
Although the mechanism of expression of the above-mentioned effect is unknown, the sensitivity is sufficiently obtained by using the latent dye which is a compound having a pKa of less than 4.5 of the conjugate acid or which does not form the conjugate acid. Of the light absorption dye and the unexposed area is excellent because the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development is 500 nm or more, and the carboxylic acid group is protected by an acid degradable group. The present inventors estimate that the sensitivity and the visibility can be compatible by containing a polymer containing a structural unit having
 以下、本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物について、詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure will be described in detail.
<共役酸のpKaが4.5未満又は共役酸を形成しない化合物であり、かつ発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が500nm以上である潜在性色素>
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、共役酸のpKaが4.5未満又は共役酸を形成しない化合物であり、かつ発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が500nm以上である潜在性色素(以下、「特定潜在性色素」ともいう。)を含有する。
 特定潜在性色素は、露光により発色する化合物であっても、露光により消色する化合物であってもよいが、感度及び視認性の観点から、露光により発色する化合物であることが好ましく、光酸発生剤から発生する酸により発色する潜在性色素であることがより好ましい。
<A latent dye whose compound has a pKa of less than 4.5 or does not form a conjugate acid and whose maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at color development is 500 nm or more>
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure is a compound in which the pKa of a conjugate acid is less than 4.5 or does not form a conjugate acid, and the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at color development is 500 nm or more. It contains a dye (hereinafter also referred to as "specific latent dye").
The specific latent dye may be a compound that develops color upon exposure or a compound that loses color upon exposure, but from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility, a compound that develops color upon exposure is preferable, and photoacid It is more preferable that it is a latent dye that develops color by an acid generated from a generator.
 特定潜在性色素は、共役酸のpKa(「pKaH」ともいう。)が4.5未満であるか、又は、共役酸を形成しない化合物である。
 本発明における化合物の共役酸のpKaとは、化合物にHが結合して得られる化学種(共役酸)のpKa(酸解離定数の負の常用対数)である。
 また、特定潜在性色素が共役酸を形成しない化合物であるとは、特定潜在性色素にHが結合して得られる化学種(共役酸)よりもHが解離しているほうが安定な化合物であることをいう。
 本開示における化合物等のpKa(pKaH)は、Advanced Chemistry Development社製ACD/Labs software Ver 8.0 for Microsoft windowsのACD/pka DB ver 8.07を使用して計算するものとする。
 また、特定潜在性色素のpKaHが、-30以上であることが好ましく、-10以上であることがより好ましい。
The specific latent dye is a compound having a conjugated acid pKa (also referred to as “pKaH”) of less than 4.5 or not forming a conjugated acid.
The pKa of the conjugate acid of the compound in the present invention is the pKa (negative common logarithm of the acid dissociation constant) of the chemical species (conjugate acid) obtained by binding H + to the compound.
In addition, a compound in which H + is dissociated is more stable than a chemical species (conjugate acid) obtained by binding H + to the specific latent dye that the specific latent dye is a compound that does not form a conjugate acid. Say that.
The pKa (pKaH) of compounds and the like in the present disclosure shall be calculated using ACD / pka DB ver 8.07 of Advanced Chemistry Development ACD / Labs software Ver 8.0 for Microsoft windows.
The pKaH of the specific latent dye is preferably -30 or more, more preferably -10 or more.
 特定潜在性色素は、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が500nm以上であり、視認性の観点から、550nm以上であることが好ましく、550nm以上700nm以下であることがより好ましく、550nm以上650nm以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、特定潜在性色素は、極大吸収波長を1つのみ有していてもよく、2つ以上有していてもよい。特定潜在性色素が極大吸収波長を2つ以上有する場合は、2つ以上の極大吸収波長のうち、吸光度の最も高い極大吸収波長が500nm以上であればよい。
 本開示における極大吸収波長の測定方法は、大気の雰囲気下で、25℃にて分光光度計:UV3100((株)島津製作所製)を用いて、400nm~780nmの範囲で透過スペクトルを測定し、光の強度が極小となる波長(極大吸収波長)を測定するものとする。
The specific latent dye has a maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, preferably 550 nm or more from the viewpoint of visibility, more preferably 550 nm to 700 nm, 550 nm More preferably, it is at least 650 nm.
In addition, the specific latent dye may have only one maximum absorption wavelength, or may have two or more. When the specific latent dye has two or more maximum absorption wavelengths, the maximum absorption wavelength at which the absorbance is the highest among the two or more maximum absorption wavelengths may be 500 nm or more.
The method of measuring the maximum absorption wavelength in the present disclosure is to measure the transmission spectrum in the range of 400 nm to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV 3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 25 ° C. under the atmosphere atmosphere. The wavelength at which the light intensity is minimized (maximum absorption wavelength) is measured.
 露光により発色する特定潜在性色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物が挙げられる。
 また、露光により消色する特定潜在性色素としては、例えば、トリフェニルメタン系色素、ジフェニルメタン系色素、オキザジン系色素、キサンテン系色素、イミノナフトキノン系色素、アゾメチン系色素、アントラキノン系色素等が挙げられる。
 中でも、特定潜在性色素としては、感度及び視認性の観点から、ロイコ化合物が好ましい。
 ロイコ化合物としては、トリフェニルメタン系、スピロピラン系、フルオラン系、ジフェニルメタン系、ローダミンラクタム系、インドリルフタリド系、ロイコオーラミン系等のロイコ化合物が挙げられる。
 また、ロイコ化合物としては、感度及び視認性の観点から、ラクトン環、スルチン環又はスルトン環が開環するものが好ましく、ラクトン環が開環して発色するロイコ化合物であることがより好ましい。
Specific latent dyes that develop color upon exposure include, for example, leuco compounds.
Further, specific latent dyes which are decolorized by exposure to light include, for example, triphenylmethane dyes, diphenylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes, azomethine dyes, anthraquinone dyes and the like. .
Among them, as the specific latent dye, a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility.
Examples of leuco compounds include leuco compounds such as triphenylmethanes, spiropyrans, fluorans, diphenylmethanes, rhodamine lactams, indolylphthalides, and leucoauramines.
Further, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility, the leuco compound is preferably one in which a lactone ring, sultin ring or sultone ring is ring-opened, and more preferably a leuco compound in which a lactone ring is ring-opened to develop color.
 また、特定潜在性色素は、感度及び視認性の観点から、下記式Iで表される化合物であることが好ましい。 The specific latent dye is preferably a compound represented by the following formula I from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 式I中、Ar1C及びAr2Cはそれぞれ独立に、芳香族基を表し、XはC、S又はS=Oを表し、R1C~R4Cはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子又は一価の有機基を表す。 In Formula I, Ar 1C and Ar 2C each independently represent an aromatic group, X C represents C, S or S = O, and R 1C to R 4C each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or one Represents a valent organic group.
 Ar1C及びAr2Cにおける芳香族基は、アリール基であっても、ヘテロアリール基であってもよく、また、単環の芳香族基であっても、2環以上が縮合した縮合環であってもよい。
 また、Ar1C及びAr2Cは、結合して環を形成してもよく、感度及び視認性の観点から、Ar1C及びAr2Cが結合してキサンテン環を形成していることが好ましい。
 Ar1C及びAr2Cにおける芳香族基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 上記置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、アルキルアリールアミノ基、ジアリールアミノ基等が挙げられ、ジアルキルアミノ基、アルキルアリールアミノ基、ジアリールアミノ基であることが好ましい。上記ジアルキルアミノ基及びアルキルアリールアミノ基におけるアルキル基はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数が2~20のアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数が2~10のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。また、上記ジアルキルアミノ基における2つのアルキル基のうち、少なくとも1つが炭素数3~20のアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数が3~10のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 これらの置換基は、更に置換基により置換されていてもよい。
 Ar1C及びAr2Cの総炭素数はそれぞれ独立に、感度及び視認性の観点から、4~50であることが好ましく、6~40であることがより好ましく、10~30であることが更に好ましい。
The aromatic group in Ar 1C and Ar 2C may be an aryl group or a heteroaryl group, and even if it is a monocyclic aromatic group, it is a condensed ring in which two or more rings are condensed. May be
Further, Ar 1C and Ar 2C may be combined to form a ring, and from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility, Ar 1C and Ar 2C are preferably combined to form a xanthene ring.
The aromatic group in Ar 1C and Ar 2C may have a substituent.
Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group, a diarylamino group and the like, and a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group and a diarylamino group Is preferred. The alkyl group in the dialkylamino group and the alkylarylamino group is preferably independently an alkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms. In addition, at least one of the two alkyl groups in the dialkylamino group is preferably an alkyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms.
These substituents may be further substituted by a substituent.
The total number of carbon atoms in Ar 1C and Ar 2C is independently preferably 4 to 50, more preferably 6 to 40, and still more preferably 10 to 30 from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility. .
 Xは、感度及び視認性の観点から、C又はS=Oであることが好ましく、Cであることがより好ましい。
 R1C~R4Cにおける一価の有機基は、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、アルキルアリールアミノ基、又は、ジアリールアミノ基であることが好ましい。
 また、R1C~R4Cの炭素数はそれぞれ独立に、0~20であることが好ましく、0~10であることがより好ましい。
 R1C~R4Cはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、又は、アリーロキシ基であることが好ましく、水素原子、フッ素原子、塩素原子、アルキル基、又は、アリール基であることがより好ましく、水素原子であることが特に好ましい。
From the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility, X C is preferably C or S = O, and more preferably C.
The monovalent organic group in R 1C to R 4C is preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group or a diarylamino group.
In addition, the carbon number of each of R 1C to R 4C is preferably independently 0 to 20, and more preferably 0 to 10.
R 1C to R 4C are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group, and a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, an alkyl group or an aryl It is more preferably a group, particularly preferably a hydrogen atom.
 特定潜在性色素の好ましい具体例として、化合物C-1~C-9を以下に記載するが、本開示における特定潜在性色素はこれらに限定されないことは言うまでもない。 Although compounds C-1 to C-9 are described below as preferable specific examples of the specific latent dyes, it goes without saying that the specific latent dyes in the present disclosure are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 特定潜在性色素は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物における特定潜在性色素の含有量は、感度及び視認性の観点から、感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、0.01質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~8質量%であることがより好ましく、0.5質量%~5質量%であることが更に好ましく、1.0質量%~3.0質量%であることが特に好ましい。
 なお、本発明において、感光性樹脂組成物における「固形分」とは、溶剤の揮発性成分を除いた成分を意味する。
The specific latent dyes may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the specific latent dye in the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure is 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility. Is preferably 0.1% by mass to 8% by mass, more preferably 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass, and 1.0% by mass to 3.0% by mass. Is particularly preferred.
In the present invention, “solid content” in the photosensitive resin composition means a component excluding the volatile component of the solvent.
<カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体>
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位(「構成単位A」ともいう。)を含有する重合体(「特定重合体」ともいう。)を含有する。
 また、本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、構成単位Aを有する重合体に加え、他の重合体を含んでいてもよい。本開示においては、構成単位Aを有する重合体及び他の重合体をあわせて、「重合体成分」ともいう。
 上記特定重合体は、露光により生じる触媒量の酸性物質の作用により、特定重合体中の酸分解性で保護されたカルボン酸基を有する構成単位Aが脱保護反応を受けカルボン酸基となる。この酸基により、硬化反応が可能となる。
 以下に構成単位Aの好ましい態様について説明する。
<A polymer containing a structural unit having a group in which a carboxylic acid group is protected by an acid-degradable group>
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure includes a polymer (also referred to as a “specific polymer”) containing a structural unit (also referred to as “structural unit A”) having a group in which a carboxylic acid group is protected with an acid-degradable group. Say).
Moreover, in addition to the polymer which has the structural unit A, the photosensitive resin composition which concerns on this indication may contain the other polymer. In the present disclosure, the polymer having the structural unit A and the other polymers are collectively referred to as a “polymer component”.
In the specific polymer, the structural unit A having an acid-degradable protected carboxylic acid group in the specific polymer undergoes a deprotection reaction to become a carboxylic acid group by the action of a catalytic amount of an acidic substance generated by exposure. This acid group enables a curing reaction.
The preferable aspect of the structural unit A is demonstrated below.
 上記感光性樹脂組成物は、更に、酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体以外の重合体を含んでいてもよい。
 また、上記重合体成分に含まれる全ての重合体がそれぞれ、後述するカルボン酸基を有する構成単位を少なくとも有する重合体であることが好ましい。
 また、上記感光性樹脂組成物は、更に、これら以外の重合体を含んでいてもよい。本開示における上記重合体成分は、特に述べない限り、必要に応じて添加される他の重合体を含めたものを意味するものとする。なお、後述する可塑剤、ヘテロ環状化合物及び界面活性剤に該当する化合物は、高分子化合物であっても、上記重合体成分に含まないものとする。
The photosensitive resin composition may further contain a polymer other than the polymer having a structural unit having an acid-degradable protected acid group.
Moreover, it is preferable that all the polymers contained in the said polymer component are polymers which have a structural unit which has the carboxylic acid group mentioned later at least, respectively.
Moreover, the said photosensitive resin composition may further contain polymers other than these. The above-mentioned polymer component in the present disclosure is intended to mean one including other polymers added as needed, unless otherwise stated. In addition, even if it is a high molecular compound, the compound applicable to the plasticizer, the heterocyclic compound, and surfactant which are mentioned later shall not be contained in the said polymer component.
 特定重合体は、付加重合型の樹脂であることが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位を有する重合体であることがより好ましい。なお、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位以外の構成単位、例えば、スチレンに由来する構成単位や、ビニル化合物に由来する構成単位等を有していてもよい。 The specific polymer is preferably a resin of addition polymerization type, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof. In addition, you may have structural units other than (meth) acrylic acid or structural units derived from its ester, for example, a structural unit derived from styrene, a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, etc.
 上記感光性樹脂組成物は、パターン形状の形成性、現像液への溶解性及び転写性の観点から、重合体成分として、上記構成単位Aとして下記式IIで表される構成単位A1を有する重合体を含むことが好ましく、重合体成分として、上記構成単位Aとして下記式IIで表される構成単位A1を有し、かつガラス転移温度が90℃以下である特定重合体を含むことが好ましく、重合体成分として、上記構成単位Aとして下記式IIで表される構成単位A1、及び、後述するカルボン酸基を有する構成単位Bを有し、かつガラス転移温度が90℃以下である特定重合体を含むことが更に好ましい。
 上記感光性樹脂組成物に含まれる特定重合体は、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
The photosensitive resin composition has a weight having a structural unit A1 represented by the following formula II as the structural unit A as a polymer component from the viewpoint of pattern formability, solubility in a developer and transferability. Preferably, the polymer component contains a specific polymer having a constituent unit A1 represented by the following formula II as the constituent unit A and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less, as the polymer component, A specific polymer having a structural unit A1 represented by the following formula II as the structural unit A and a structural unit B having a carboxylic acid group described later as a polymer component and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less More preferably,
The specific polymer contained in the photosensitive resin composition may be only one type, or two or more types.
<<構成単位A>>
 上記重合体成分は、カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位Aを少なくとも有する重合体を含む。上記重合体成分が構成単位Aを有する重合体を含むことにより、極めて高感度な化学増幅ポジ型の感光性樹脂層とすることができる。
 本開示における「カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基」は、酸分解性基として公知のものを使用でき、特に限定されない。酸分解性基としては、酸により比較的分解し易い基(例えば、後述する式IIで表される基で保護されたエステル基、テトラヒドロピラニルエステル基、又は、テトラヒドロフラニルエステル基等のアセタール系官能基)や酸により比較的分解し難い基(例えば、tert-ブチルエステル基等の第三級アルキル基、tert-ブチルカーボネート基等の第三級アルキルカーボネート基)を用いることができる。
 これらの中でも、上記酸分解性基としては、アセタールの形で保護された構造を有する基であることが好ましい。
<< Constituent Unit A >>
The polymer component includes a polymer having at least a structural unit A having a group in which a carboxylic acid group is protected by an acid-degradable group. When the polymer component contains a polymer having the structural unit A, it is possible to obtain a highly sensitive chemically amplified positive type photosensitive resin layer.
As the “group in which the carboxylic acid group is protected with an acid-degradable group” in the present disclosure, those known as an acid-degradable group can be used without particular limitation. As the acid-degradable group, a group which is relatively easy to be decomposed by acid (for example, an acetal-based functional group such as an ester group protected by a group represented by formula II described later, tetrahydropyranyl ester group, or tetrahydrofuranyl ester group) Groups or groups which are relatively difficult to be decomposed by acids (eg, tertiary alkyl groups such as tert-butyl ester group, tertiary alkyl carbonate groups such as tert-butyl carbonate group) can be used.
Among these, as the above-mentioned acid-decomposable group, a group having a structure protected in the form of acetal is preferable.
 上記カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位Aは、感度及び解像度の観点から、下記式IIで表される構成単位A1であることが好ましい。 The structural unit A having a group in which the carboxylic acid group is protected by an acid-degradable group is preferably a structural unit A1 represented by the following formula II, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 式II中、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR及びRのいずれか一方が、アルキル基又はアリール基であり、Rはアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R又はRと、Rとが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表す。 In Formula II, R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 3 is an alkyl group Or R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X represents a single bond or an arylene group.
 式II中、R又はRがアルキル基の場合、炭素数は1~10のアルキル基が好ましい。R又はRがアリール基の場合、フェニル基が好ましい。R及びRは、それぞれ、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 式II中、Rは、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 また、R~Rにおけるアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 式II中、R又はRと、Rとが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R又はRと、Rとが連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好ましい。環状エーテルの環員数は特に制限はないが、5又は6であることが好ましく、5であることがより好ましい。
 式II中、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表し、単結合が好ましい。アリーレン基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 特定重合体が式IIで表される構成単位A1を含むことで、パターン形成時の感度に優れ、また、解像度より優れる。
In the formula II, when R 1 or R 2 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 1 or R 2 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferred. Each of R 1 and R 2 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In Formula II, R 3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
In addition, the alkyl group and the aryl group in R 1 to R 3 may have a substituent.
In formula II, R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and it is preferable that R 1 or R 2 and R 3 are linked to form a cyclic ether. The number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
In formula II, X represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferred. The arylene group may have a substituent.
When the specific polymer contains the structural unit A1 represented by the formula II, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is excellent, and is superior to the resolution.
 式II中、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、特定重合体のTgをより低くし得るという観点から、水素原子であることが好ましい。
 より具体的には、特定重合体に含まれる構成単位A1の全量に対し、式IIにおけるRが水素原子である構成単位は20質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、構成単位A1中の、式IIにおけるRが水素原子である構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
In formula II, R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint of lowering the Tg of the specific polymer.
More specifically, it is preferable that the structural unit whose R 4 in Formula II is a hydrogen atom is 20% by mass or more with respect to the total amount of the structural unit A1 contained in the specific polymer.
In addition, content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit whose R 4 in Formula II is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit A1 is calculated by 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement according to a conventional method. It can confirm by intensity ratio of peak intensity.
 式IIで表される構成単位A1の中でも、下記式A2で表される構成単位が、パターン形成時の感度を更に高める観点からより好ましい。 Among the structural units A1 represented by the formula II, structural units represented by the following formula A2 are more preferable from the viewpoint of further enhancing the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 式A2中、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、R35~R41はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。
 式A2中、R34は水素原子が好ましい。
 式A2中、R35~R41は、水素原子が好ましい。
In formula A2, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 35 to R 41 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In formula A2, R 34 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula A2, R 35 to R 41 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
 式IIで表される、カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位A1の好ましい具体例としては、下記の構成単位が例示できる。なお、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表す。 The following structural unit can be illustrated as a preferable specific example of structural unit A1 which has a group with which the carboxylic acid group was protected by the acid-degradable group represented by Formula II. R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 特定重合体に含まれる構成単位Aは、1種であっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 特定重合体における構成単位Aの含有量は、特定重合体の全質量に対して、20質量%以上であることが好ましく、20質量%~90質量%であることがより好ましく、30質量%~70質量%であることが更に好ましい。
 特定重合体における構成単位Aの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
 また、全ての重合体成分を構成単位(モノマー単位)に分解したうえで、構成単位Aの割合は、重合体成分の全質量に対して、5質量%~80質量%であることが好ましく、10質量%~80質量%であることがより好ましく、10質量%~40質量%であることが更に好ましく、10質量%~30質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The constituent unit A contained in the specific polymer may be one type or two or more types.
The content of the structural unit A in the specific polymer is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass, and more preferably 30% by mass to the total mass of the specific polymer. More preferably, it is 70% by mass.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the specific polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensities calculated from 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
Further, the ratio of the structural unit A is preferably 5% by mass to 80% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer component after all the polymer components are decomposed into constituent units (monomer units). It is more preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, still more preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass, and particularly preferably 10% by mass to 30% by mass.
<<構成単位B>>
 上記特定重合体は、カルボン酸基を有する構成単位Bを含むことが好ましい。
 構成単位Bは、保護基、例えば、酸分解性基で保護されていないカルボン酸基、すなわち、保護基を有さないカルボン酸基を含む構成単位である。特定重合体が構成単位Bを含むことで、パターン形成時の感度が良好となり、パターン露光後の現像工程においてアルカリ性の現像液に溶けやすくなり、現像時間の短縮化を図ることができる。
<< Constituent Unit B >>
The specific polymer preferably contains a structural unit B having a carboxylic acid group.
The structural unit B is a structural unit including a protective group, for example, a carboxylic acid group not protected with an acid-degradable group, that is, a carboxylic acid group having no protective group. When the specific polymer contains the structural unit B, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation becomes good, and it becomes easily soluble in an alkaline developer in the development step after pattern exposure, and the development time can be shortened.
 特定重合体へのカルボン酸基を有する構成単位の導入は、カルボン酸基を有するモノマーを共重合させることで行うことができる。
 構成単位Bである、カルボン酸基を含む構成単位は、スチレンに由来する構成単位若しくはビニル化合物に由来する構成単位に対してカルボン酸基が置換した構成単位、又は、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位であることがより好ましい。
The introduction of a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group into a specific polymer can be carried out by copolymerizing a monomer having a carboxylic acid group.
The structural unit containing a carboxylic acid group, which is the structural unit B, is a structural unit derived from styrene or a structural unit obtained by substituting a carboxylic acid group for a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, or derived from (meth) acrylic acid It is more preferable that it is a structural unit.
 特定重合体に含まれる構成単位Bは、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 特定重合体は、特定重合体の全質量に対し、カルボン酸基を有する構成単位(構成単位B)を0.1質量%~20質量%含むことが好ましく、0.5質量%~15質量%含むことがより好ましく、1質量%~10質量%含むことが更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、パターン形成性がより良好となる。
 特定重合体における構成単位Bの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The constituent unit B contained in the specific polymer may be only one type or two or more types.
The specific polymer preferably contains 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass of a structural unit (structural unit B) having a carboxylic acid group based on the total mass of the specific polymer, and is preferably 0.5% by mass to 15% by mass It is more preferable to include, and it is further preferable to include 1% by mass to 10% by mass. Within the above range, pattern formability becomes better.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the specific polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensities calculated from 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
<<その他の構成単位>>
 特定重合体は、既述の構成単位A及び構成単位B以外の、他の構成単位(以下、構成単位Cと称することがある。)を、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲で含んでいてもよい。
 構成単位Cを形成するモノマーとしては、特に制限はなく、例えば、スチレン類、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸環状アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸アリールエステル、不飽和ジカルボン酸ジエステル、ビシクロ不飽和化合物、マレイミド化合物、不飽和芳香族化合物、共役ジエン系化合物、不飽和モノカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸無水物、脂肪族環式骨格を有する基、その他の不飽和化合物を挙げることができる。
 構成単位Cを用いて、種類及び含有量の少なくともいずれかを調整することで、特定重合体の諸特性を調整することができる。特に、構成単位Cを適切に使用することで、特定重合体のTgを90℃以下に容易に調整することができる。
 特定重合体は、構成単位Cを1種のみ含んでもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
<< Other composition unit >>
The specific polymer does not impair the effects of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure other structural units (hereinafter, may be referred to as structural unit C) other than the structural unit A and the structural unit B described above. You may include in the range.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a monomer which forms the structural unit C, For example, Styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diester , Bicyclo unsaturated compound, maleimide compound, unsaturated aromatic compound, conjugated diene compound, unsaturated monocarboxylic acid, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydride, group having aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other unsaturated Saturated compounds can be mentioned.
Various properties of the specific polymer can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the type and the content using the structural unit C. In particular, by appropriately using the structural unit C, the Tg of the specific polymer can be easily adjusted to 90 ° C. or less.
The specific polymer may contain only one type of the structural unit C, or may contain two or more types.
 構成単位Cは、具体的には、スチレン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、メトキシスチレン、エトキシスチレン、クロロスチレン、ビニル安息香酸メチル、ビニル安息香酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、アクリロニトリル、又は、エチレングリコールモノアセトアセテートモノ(メタ)アクリレートなどを重合して形成される構成単位を挙げることができる。その他、特開2004-264623号公報の段落0021~段落0024に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 Specifically, structural unit C is styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinyl benzoate, ethyl vinyl benzoate, (meth) Methyl acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) Examples thereof include structural units formed by polymerizing benzyl acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, or ethylene glycol monoacetoacetate mono (meth) acrylate. In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 0021 to 0024 of JP-A-2004-264623 can be mentioned.
 また、構成単位Cとしては、芳香環を有する構成単位、又は、脂肪族環式骨格を有する構成単位が、得られる転写材料の電気特性を向上させる観点で好ましい。これら構成単位を形成するモノマーとして、具体的には、スチレン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、及び、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。中でも、構成単位Cとしては、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位が好ましく挙げられる。 Further, as the structural unit C, a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical properties of the transfer material to be obtained. Specifically as a monomer which forms these structural units, styrene, tert- butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, alpha-methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, And benzyl (meth) acrylate and the like. Among them, as the structural unit C, structural units derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate are preferably mentioned.
 また、構成単位Cを形成するモノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが、密着性の観点で好ましい。中でも、炭素数4~12のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが密着性の観点でより好ましい。具体的には、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシルが挙げられる。 Moreover, as a monomer which forms the structural unit C, (meth) acrylic-acid alkylester is preferable in the adhesive viewpoint, for example. Among them, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Specific examples thereof include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
 構成単位Cの含有量は、特定重合体の全質量に対し、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましく、50質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限値としては、0質量%でもよいが、1質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度及び感光性樹脂組成物により形成される感光性樹脂層の密着性がより向上する。 70 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the total mass of a specific polymer, as for content of the structural unit C, 60 mass% or less is more preferable, and 50 mass% or less is still more preferable. The lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and the adhesion of the photosensitive resin layer formed of the photosensitive resin composition are further improved.
 特定重合体が、構成単位Cとして、上記構成単位Bにおける酸基のエステルを有する構成単位を含むことも、現像液に対する溶解性、及び、後述する感光性樹脂層の物理物性を最適化する観点から好ましい。
 中でも、特定重合体は、構成単位Bとして、カルボン酸基を有する構成単位を含み、更に、カルボン酸エステル基を含む構成単位Cを共重合成分として含むことが好ましく、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸由来の構成単位Bと、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル又は(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル由来の構成単位(c)とを含む重合体がより好ましい。
 以下、本開示における特定重合体の好ましい例を挙げるが、本開示は以下の例示に限定されない。なお、下記例示化合物における構成単位の比率、重量平均分子量は、好ましい物性を得るために適宜選択される。
The specific polymer also includes a constituent unit having an ester of an acid group in the above-mentioned constituent unit B as the constituent unit C, and a viewpoint of optimizing the solubility in a developer and physical properties of the photosensitive resin layer described later. It is preferable from
Among them, the specific polymer preferably contains, as the structural unit B, a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group, and further preferably contains a structural unit C containing a carboxylic acid ester group as a copolymerization component, for example, (meth) acrylic acid More preferred is a polymer containing the structural unit B derived from and a structural unit (c) derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate or n-butyl (meth) acrylate.
Hereinafter, although the preferable example of the specific polymer in this indication is given, this indication is not limited to the following illustrations. In addition, the ratio of the structural unit in the following exemplary compounds and the weight average molecular weight are suitably selected in order to obtain preferable physical properties.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
<<重合体のガラス転移温度:Tg>>
 本開示における特定重合体のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、90℃以下であることが好ましい。Tgが90℃以下であることで、感光性樹脂組成物により形成される感光性樹脂層は高い密着性を有し、転写性により優れる。
 上記Tgは、60℃以下であることがより好ましく、40℃以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、上記Tgの下限値には特に制限はないが、-20℃以上が好ましく、-10℃以上がより好ましい。特定重合体のTgが-20℃以上であることで、良好なパターン形成性が維持され、また、例えば、カバーフィルムを用いる場合、カバーフィルムを剥離する際の剥離性低下が抑制される。
 更に、本開示における上記重合体成分全体のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、転写性の観点から、90℃以下であることが好ましく、60℃以下であることがより好ましく、40℃以下であることが更に好ましい。
<< Glass transition temperature of polymer: Tg >>
It is preferable that the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the specific polymer in this indication is 90 degrees C or less. When the Tg is 90 ° C. or less, the photosensitive resin layer formed of the photosensitive resin composition has high adhesion and is more excellent in transferability.
The Tg is more preferably 60 ° C. or less, still more preferably 40 ° C. or less.
Further, the lower limit value of the above Tg is not particularly limited, but is preferably −20 ° C. or more, more preferably −10 ° C. or more. When the Tg of the specific polymer is −20 ° C. or higher, good pattern formability is maintained, and, for example, when a cover film is used, the decrease in peelability at the time of peeling the cover film is suppressed.
Furthermore, the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the entire polymer component in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or less, more preferably 60 ° C. or less, and 40 ° C. or less from the viewpoint of transferability. Is more preferred.
 重合体のガラス転移温度は、示差走査熱量測定(DSC)を用いて測定することができる。
 具体的な測定方法は、JIS K 7121(1987年)又はJIS K 6240(2011年)に記載の方法に順じて行なった。本明細書におけるガラス転移温度は、補外ガラス転移開始温度(以下、Tigと称することがある)を用いている。
 ガラス転移温度の測定方法をより具体的に説明する。
 ガラス転移温度を求める場合、予想される重合体のTgより約50℃低い温度にて装置が安定するまで保持した後、加熱速度:20℃/分で、ガラス転移が終了した温度よりも約30℃高い温度まで加熱し,DTA曲線又はDSC曲線を描かせる。
 補外ガラス転移開始温度(Tig)、すなわち、本明細書におけるガラス転移温度Tgは、DTA曲線又はDSC曲線における低温側のベースラインを高温側に延長した直線と、ガラス転移の階段状変化部分の曲線の勾配が最大になる点で引いた接線との交点の温度として求める。
The glass transition temperature of the polymer can be measured using differential scanning calorimetry (DSC).
The specific measurement method was performed in accordance with the method described in JIS K 7121 (1987) or JIS K 6240 (2011). The glass transition temperature in the present specification uses an extrapolated glass transition start temperature (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Tig).
The method of measuring the glass transition temperature will be described more specifically.
When the glass transition temperature is determined, the temperature is kept at about 50 ° C. lower than the expected polymer Tg until the device is stabilized, and then the heating rate: 20 ° C./min, and the temperature is about 30 Heat to a high temperature and draw a DTA curve or a DSC curve.
Extrapolation glass transition start temperature (Tig), that is, the glass transition temperature Tg in the present specification, is a straight line extending the baseline on the low temperature side in the DTA curve or DSC curve to the high temperature side, and the step change portion of the glass transition It is determined as the temperature at the point of intersection with the tangent drawn at the point where the slope of the curve is at a maximum.
 重合体のTgを、既述の好ましい範囲に調整する方法としては、例えば、目的とする重合体の各構成単位の単独重合体のTgと各構成単位の質量比より、FOX式を指針にして、目的とする特定重合体のTgを制御することが可能である。
 FOX式について
 重合体に含まれる第1の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg1、第1の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW1とし、第2の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg2とし、第2の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW2としたときに、第1の構成単位と第2の構成単位とを含む共重合体のTg0(K)は、以下の式にしたがって推定することが可能である。
 FOX式:1/Tg0=(W1/Tg1)+(W2/Tg2)
 既述のFOX式を用いて、共重合体に含まれる各構成単位の種類と質量分率を調整して、所望のTgを有する共重合体を得ることができる。
 また、重合体の重量平均分子量を調整することにより、重合体のTgを調整することも可能である。
As a method of adjusting the Tg of the polymer to the preferable range described above, for example, the FOX formula is used as a guideline from the Tg of the homopolymer of each constitutional unit of the target polymer and the mass ratio of each constitutional unit It is possible to control the Tg of the target specific polymer.
Regarding FOX Formula The Tg of the homopolymer of the first constitutional unit contained in the polymer is Tg1, the mass fraction of the copolymer of the first constitutional unit is W1, and the Tg of the homopolymer of the second constitutional unit Is Tg2 and the mass fraction of the copolymer of the second structural unit is W2, the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is It is possible to estimate according to the equation.
FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 = (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
The type and mass fraction of each structural unit contained in the copolymer can be adjusted using the above-described FOX formula to obtain a copolymer having a desired Tg.
Moreover, it is also possible to adjust Tg of a polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of a polymer.
<<重合体の分子量:Mw>>
 特定重合体の分子量は、ポリスチレン換算重量平均分子量で、60,000以下であることが好ましい。特定重合体の重量平均分子量が60,000以下であることで、後述する感光性転写材料における感光性樹脂層の溶融粘度を低く抑え、基板と貼り合わせる際において低温(例えば130℃以下)での貼り合わせを実現することができる。
 また、特定重合体の重量平均分子量は、2,000~60,000であることが好ましく、3,000~50,000であることがより好ましく、10,000~30,000であることが更に好ましい。
 なお、重合体の重量平均分子量は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー)によって測定することができ、測定装置としては、様々な市販の装置を用いることができ、装置の内容、及び、測定技術は同当業者に公知である。
 ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)による重量平均分子量の測定は、測定装置として、HLC(登録商標)-8220GPC(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとして、TSKgel(登録商標)Super HZM-M(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ4000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ3000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ2000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)をそれぞれ1本、直列に連結したものを用い、溶離液として、THF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いることができる。
 また、測定条件としては、試料濃度を0.2質量%、流速を0.35ml/min、サンプル注入量を10μl、及び測定温度を40℃とし、示差屈折率(RI)検出器を用いて行うことができる。
 検量線は、東ソー(株)製の「標準試料TSK standard,polystyrene」:「F-40」、「F-20」、「F-4」、「F-1」、「A-5000」、「A-2500」及び「A-1000」の7サンプルのいずれかを用いて作製できる。
<< molecular weight of polymer: Mw >>
The molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of weight average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene. When the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is 60,000 or less, the melt viscosity of the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer material described later is suppressed low, and when bonding to the substrate, the temperature is low (for example, 130 ° C. or less). Bonding can be realized.
In addition, the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, more preferably 3,000 to 50,000, and still more preferably 10,000 to 30,000. preferable.
In addition, the weight average molecular weight of a polymer can be measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and various commercially available apparatuses can be used as a measuring apparatus, and the contents of the apparatus and the measuring technique It is known to those skilled in the art.
The measurement of the weight average molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) is carried out using HLC (registered trademark)-8220 GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corp.) as a measuring device, and TSKgel (registered trademark) Super HZM-M (4) as a column. .6 mm ID x 15 cm, Tosoh Corp. product, Super HZ 4000 (4.6 mm ID x 15 cm, Tosoh Corp. product), Super HZ 3000 (4.6 mm ID x 15 cm, Tosoh Corp. product), Super HZ 2000 (4.6 mm ID) It is possible to use THF (tetrahydrofuran) as an eluent using one obtained by connecting in series each one x 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp., in series.
In addition, as measurement conditions, the sample concentration is 0.2% by mass, the flow rate is 0.35 ml / min, the sample injection amount is 10 μl, and the measurement temperature is 40 ° C., using a differential refractive index (RI) detector be able to.
The standard curve is the "standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene" manufactured by Tosoh Corp .: "F-40", "F-20", "F-4", "F-1", "A-5000", " It can be prepared using any of the seven samples of A-2500 "and" A-1000 ".
 特定重合体の数平均分子量と重量平均分子量との比(分散度)は、1.0~5.0が好ましく、1.05~3.5がより好ましい。 The ratio (dispersion degree) of the number average molecular weight to the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, and more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
<<特定重合体の製造方法>>
 特定重合体の製造方法(合成法)は特に限定されないが、一例を挙げると、式IIで表される構成単位A1を形成するための重合性単量体、カルボン酸基を有する構成単位Bを形成するための重合性単量体、更に必要に応じて、その他の構成単位Cを形成するための重合性単量体を含む溶剤中、重合開始剤を用いて重合することにより合成することができる。また、いわゆる高分子反応で合成することもできる。
<< Method of producing specific polymer >>
The method for producing the specific polymer (synthetic method) is not particularly limited, but one example is a polymerizable monomer for forming the structural unit A1 represented by the formula II, a structural unit B having a carboxylic acid group Synthesis by polymerization using a polymerization initiator in a solvent containing a polymerizable monomer for forming, and, if necessary, a polymerizable monomer for forming another constitutional unit C it can. Moreover, it can also be synthesized by so-called polymer reaction.
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、感度及び解像性の観点から、感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、特定重合体を50質量%~99.9質量%の割合で含むことが好ましく、70質量%~98質量%の割合で含むことがより好ましい。
 また、本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、感度及び解像性の観点から、感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、上記重合体成分を50質量%~99.9質量%の割合で含むことが好ましく、70質量%~98質量%の割合で含むことがより好ましい。
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure contains the specific polymer in a proportion of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. Is preferable, and it is more preferable to include 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
In addition, the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure has a ratio of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass of the above polymer component with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. It is preferable to contain at a ratio of 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
<<他の重合体>>
 上記感光性樹脂組成物は、重合体成分として、特定重合体に加え、本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物の効果を損なわない範囲において、構成単位Aを含まない重合体(「他の重合体」と称する場合がある。)を更に含んでいてもよい。上記感光性樹脂組成物が他の重合体を含む場合、他の重合体の配合量は、全重合体成分中、50質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましく、20質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
<< Other polymer >>
The above-mentioned photosensitive resin composition contains, as a polymer component, a polymer not containing the structural unit A (“the other polymer in a range not impairing the effect of the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure in addition to the specific polymer May be further included). When the said photosensitive resin composition contains another polymer, it is preferable that the compounding quantity of another polymer is 50 mass% or less in all the polymer components, and it is more preferable that it is 30 mass% or less More preferably, it is 20% by mass or less.
 上記感光性樹脂組成物は、特定重合体に加え、他の重合体を1種類のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。
 他の重合体として、例えばポリヒドロキシスチレンを用いることができ、市販されている、SMA 1000P、SMA 2000P、SMA 3000P、SMA 1440F、SMA 17352P、SMA 2625P、及び、SMA 3840F(以上、サートマー社製)、ARUFON UC-3000、ARUFON UC-3510、ARUFON UC-3900、ARUFON UC-3910、ARUFON UC-3920、及び、ARUFON UC-3080(以上、東亞合成(株)製)、並びに、Joncryl 690、Joncryl 678、Joncryl 67、及び、Joncryl 586(以上、BASF社製)等を用いることもできる。
The photosensitive resin composition may contain only one type of other polymer in addition to the specific polymer, or may contain two or more types.
As other polymers, for example, polyhydroxystyrene can be used, and commercially available SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (all, manufactured by Sartmar) , ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (all manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and Joncryl 690, Joncryl 678 , Joncryl 67, and Joncryl 586 (above, manufactured by BASF Corp.) can also be used.
<光酸発生剤>
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、光酸発生剤を含有する。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、紫外線、遠紫外線、X線、及び、荷電粒子線等の放射線を照射することにより酸を発生することができる化合物である。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、波長300nm以上、好ましくは波長300nm~450nmの活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物が好ましいが、その化学構造は制限されない。また、波長300nm以上の活性光線に直接感応しない光酸発生剤についても、増感剤と併用することによって波長300nm以上の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物であれば、増感剤と組み合わせて好ましく用いることができる。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤から発生する酸のpKaは、感度及び視認性の観点から、4.0以下であることが好ましく、3.0以下であることがより好ましく、2.0以下であることが更に好ましく、-1.0以下であることが特に好ましい。光酸発生剤から発生する酸のpKaの下限値は特に定めないが、例えば、-10.0以上であることが好ましく、感度及び視認性の観点から、-4.0以上であることがより好ましく、-3.5以上が更に好ましく、-3.0以上が特に好ましい。
<Photo acid generator>
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure contains a photoacid generator.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with radiation such as ultraviolet light, far ultraviolet light, X-ray, and charged particle beam.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that responds to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm, and generates an acid, but its chemical structure is not limited. In addition, a photoacid generator which does not directly react to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that responds to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more to generate an acid It can be preferably used in combination.
The pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably 4.0 or less, more preferably 3.0 or less, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility. The following is more preferable, and -1.0 or less is particularly preferable. The lower limit of the pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator is not particularly limited, but is preferably, for example, -10.0 or more, and from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility, it is more preferably -4.0 or more Preferably, it is -3.5 or more, more preferably -3.0 or more.
 また、上記光酸発生剤から発生する酸が、感度及び視認性の観点から、リン酸及びスルホン酸よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の酸であることが好ましく、スルホン酸であることがより好ましく、下記式S1又は式S2で表されるスルホン酸であることが更に好ましい。 The acid generated from the photoacid generator is preferably at least one acid selected from the group consisting of phosphoric acid and sulfonic acid from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility, and is sulfonic acid. The sulfonic acid is more preferably a sulfonic acid represented by the following formula S1 or S2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 式S1及び式S2中、Rは、アルキル基を表し、Lは、炭素数2以上のアルキレン基を表し、nsは0又は1を表し、ただし、Rがハロゲン原子を有するアルキル基である場合はnが1であり、Xはそれぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基又はアリーロキシ基を表し、msは、0~5の整数を表す。 In formulas S1 and S2, R S represents an alkyl group, L S represents an alkylene group having 2 or more carbon atoms, ns represents 0 or 1, provided that R S is an alkyl group having a halogen atom in some cases an n is 1, X S are each independently, represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group, ms represents an integer of 0-5.
 Rにおけるアルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 上記置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、アルコキシ基、及び、アリーロキシ基等が挙げられる。
 Rにおけるアルキル基の炭素数は、1~20であることが好ましく、2~16であることがより好ましい。
 Lは、炭素数2~20のアルキレン基であることが好ましく、炭素数2~8のアルキレン基であることがより好ましく、エチレン基であることが特に好ましい。
 Xはそれぞれ独立に、アルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~20のアルキル基であることがより好ましく、炭素数1~8のアルキル基であることが更に好ましく、メチル基であることが特に好ましい。
 msは、0~3の整数であることが好ましく、0又は1であることがより好ましく、1であることが特に好ましい。
The alkyl group in R S may have a substituent.
Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, and an aryloxy group.
The carbon number of the alkyl group in R 2 S is preferably 1 to 20, and more preferably 2 to 16.
L S is preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an ethylene group.
X S are each independently preferably an alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a methyl group Is particularly preferred.
ms is preferably an integer of 0 to 3, more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 1.
 光酸発生剤としては、イオン性光酸発生剤と、非イオン性光酸発生剤とを挙げることができる。
 また、光酸発生剤としては、感度及び解像度の観点から、後述するオニウム塩化合物、及び、後述するオキシムスルホネート化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことが好ましく、オキシムスルホネート化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
As a photo-acid generator, an ionic photo-acid generator and a nonionic photo-acid generator can be mentioned.
Further, the photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound described later and an oxime sulfonate compound described later from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and an oxime sulfonate compound More preferably,
 非イオン性光酸発生剤の例として、トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、イミドスルホネート化合物、及び、オキシムスルホネート化合物などを挙げることができる。これらの中でも、感度、解像度、及び、密着性の観点から、光酸発生剤がオキシムスルホネート化合物であることが好ましい。これら光酸発生剤は、1種単独又は2種類以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、及び、ジアゾメタン誘導体の具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0083~段落0088に記載の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of nonionic photoacid generators include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imidosulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds. Among these, the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound in terms of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion. These photoacid generators can be used singly or in combination of two or more. As specific examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines and diazomethane derivatives, compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP-A-2011-221494 can be exemplified.
 オキシムスルホネート化合物、すなわち、オキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物としては、下記式(B1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物が好ましい。 The oxime sulfonate compound, that is, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure, is preferably a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the following formula (B1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 式(B1)中、R21は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、*は他の原子又は他の基との結合部位を表す。 In formula (B1), R 21 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and * represents a bonding site to another atom or another group.
 式(B1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物は、いずれの基も置換されてもよく、R21におけるアルキル基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐構造を有していても、環構造を有していてもよい。許容される置換基は以下に説明する。
 R21のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の、直鎖状又は分岐状アルキル基が好ましい。R21のアルキル基は、炭素数6~11のアリール基、炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基、シクロアルキル基(7,7-ジメチル-2-オキソノルボルニル基などの有橋式脂環基を含む、好ましくはビシクロアルキル基等)、又は、ハロゲン原子で置換されてもよい。
 R21のアリール基としては、炭素数6~18のアリール基が好ましく、フェニル基又はナフチル基がより好ましい。R21のアリール基は、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、アルコキシ基及びハロゲン原子よりなる群から選ばれた1つ以上の基で置換されてもよい。
In the compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (B1), any group may be substituted, and the alkyl group in R 21 may be linear or branched, It may have a ring structure. The permissible substituents are described below.
As the alkyl group for R 21, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. The alkyl group of R 21 is a bridged alicyclic group such as an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and a cycloalkyl group (7, 7-dimethyl-2-oxo norbornyl group, etc. And preferably a bicycloalkyl group or the like, or a halogen atom.
The aryl group of R 21 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group. The aryl group of R 21 may be substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group and a halogen atom.
 また、式(B1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物としては、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0078~0111に記載のオキシムスルホネート化合物、又は、特開2015-151347号公報の段落0080~0081に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Moreover, as a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (B1), an oxime sulfonate compound described in paragraphs 0078 to 0111 of JP-A 2014-85643, or a paragraph 0080 of JP-A 2015-151347 And compounds described in ~ 0081.
 イオン性光酸発生剤の例として、ジアリールヨードニウム塩類及びトリアリールスルホニウム塩類等のオニウム塩化合物、第四級アンモニウム塩類等を挙げることができる。これらのうち、オニウム塩化合物が好ましく、トリアリールスルホニウム塩類及びジアリールヨードニウム塩類が特に好ましい。 Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts. Among these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
 イオン性光酸発生剤としては特開2014-85643号公報の段落0114~0133に記載のイオン性光酸発生剤も好ましく用いることができる。 As the ionic photoacid generator, the ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
 光酸発生剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 上記感光性樹脂組成物における光酸発生剤の含有量は、感度、解像度の観点から、上記感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.5質量%~5質量%であることがより好ましい。
A photo-acid generator may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
From the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, the content of the photoacid generator in the photosensitive resin composition is 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. Preferably, 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass is more preferable.
<塩基性化合物>
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、塩基性化合物を更に含有することが好ましい。
 塩基性化合物としては、化学増幅レジストで用いられる塩基性化合物の中から任意に選択して使用することができる。例えば、脂肪族アミン、芳香族アミン、複素環式アミン、第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩等が挙げられる。これらの具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0204~段落0207に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Basic compound>
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure preferably further contains a basic compound.
As the basic compound, any one of basic compounds used in a chemical amplification resist can be selected and used. For example, aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids can be mentioned. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraphs [0204] to [0207] of JP-A-2011-221494, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 具体的には、脂肪族アミンとしては、例えば、トリメチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、ジ-n-プロピルアミン、トリ-n-プロピルアミン、ジ-n-ペンチルアミン、トリ-n-ペンチルアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、ジシクロヘキシルアミン、及び、ジシクロヘキシルメチルアミンなどが挙げられる。
 芳香族アミンとしては、例えば、アニリン、ベンジルアミン、N,N-ジメチルアニリン、及び、ジフェニルアミンなどが挙げられる。
 複素環式アミンとしては、例えば、ピリジン、2-メチルピリジン、4-メチルピリジン、2-エチルピリジン、4-エチルピリジン、2-フェニルピリジン、4-フェニルピリジン、N-メチル-4-フェニルピリジン、4-ジメチルアミノピリジン、イミダゾール、ベンズイミダゾール、4-メチルイミダゾール、2-フェニルベンズイミダゾール、2,4,5-トリフェニルイミダゾール、ニコチン、ニコチン酸、ニコチン酸アミド、キノリン、8-オキシキノリン、ピラジン、ピラゾール、ピリダジン、プリン、ピロリジン、ピペリジン、ピペラジン、モルホリン、4-メチルモルホリン、シクロヘキシルモルホリノエチルチオウレア(CMTU)、1,5-ジアザビシクロ[4.3.0]-5-ノネン、及び、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.3.0]-7-ウンデセンなどが挙げられる。
 第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシドとしては、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、テトラ-n-ヘキシルアンモニウムヒドロキシドなどが挙げられる。
 カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩としては、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムアセテート、テトラメチルアンモニウムベンゾエート、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムアセテート、及び、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムベンゾエートなどが挙げられる。
Specifically, as aliphatic amines, for example, trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine Examples include ethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, and dicyclohexylmethylamine.
Examples of aromatic amines include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, and diphenylamine.
Examples of the heterocyclic amine include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinic acid amide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, cyclohexylmorpholinoethylthiourea (CMTU), 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene, and 1,8- Diazabishi (B) [5.3.0] -7-undecene and the like.
Examples of quaternary ammonium hydroxides include tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide, tetraethyl ammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-butyl ammonium hydroxide, and tetra-n-hexyl ammonium hydroxide.
Examples of quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids include tetramethyl ammonium acetate, tetramethyl ammonium benzoate, tetra-n-butyl ammonium acetate, and tetra-n-butyl ammonium benzoate.
 上記塩基性化合物は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 塩基性化合物の含有量は、上記感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、0.001質量%~5質量%であることが好ましく、0.005質量%~3質量%であることがより好ましい。
The above basic compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass, and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass, with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. More preferable.
<溶剤>
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、溶剤を更に含有することが好ましい。
 また、上記感光性樹脂組成物は、後述する感光性樹脂層を容易に形成するため、一旦溶剤を含有させて感光性樹脂組成物の粘度を調節し、溶剤を含む感光性樹脂組成物を塗布及び乾燥して、感光性樹脂層を好適に形成することができる。
 本開示に使用される溶剤としては、公知の溶剤を用いることができる。溶剤としては、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジエチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、エステル類、ケトン類、アミド類、及び、ラクトン類等が例示できる。また、溶剤の具体例としては特開2011-221494号公報の段落0174~段落0178に記載の溶剤も挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Solvent>
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure preferably further contains a solvent.
Moreover, in order to form easily the photosensitive resin layer mentioned later, the said photosensitive resin composition is made to contain a solvent once, the viscosity of the photosensitive resin composition is adjusted, and the photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent is apply | coated. And it can dry and can form a photosensitive resin layer suitably.
A well-known solvent can be used as a solvent used for this indication. As a solvent, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol mono alkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol mono alkyl ethers, propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol mono alkyl ether acetates, diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers And diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, and lactones. Further, specific examples of the solvent also include the solvents described in paragraphs [0174] to [0178] of JP-A-2011-221494, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification.
 また、既述の溶剤に、更に必要に応じて、ベンジルエチルエーテル、ジヘキシルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノフェニルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、イソホロン、カプロン酸、カプリル酸、1-オクタノール、1-ノナール、ベンジルアルコール、アニソール、酢酸ベンジル、安息香酸エチル、シュウ酸ジエチル、マレイン酸ジエチル、炭酸エチレン、又は、炭酸プロピレン等の溶剤を添加することもできる。
 溶剤は、1種のみ用いてもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 本開示に用いることができる溶剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種を併用することがより好ましい。溶剤を2種以上使用する場合には、例えば、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類とジアルキルエーテル類との併用、ジアセテート類とジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類との併用、又は、エステル類とブチレングリコールアルキルエーテルアセテート類との併用が好ましい。
In addition to the solvents described above, benzyl ethyl ether, dihexyl ether, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, isophorone, caproic acid, caprylic acid, 1-octanol, 1 if necessary. Solvents such as nonal, benzyl alcohol, anisole, benzyl acetate, ethyl benzoate, diethyl oxalate, diethyl maleate, ethylene carbonate or propylene carbonate can also be added.
The solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The solvents that can be used in the present disclosure may be used alone or in combination of two. When two or more solvents are used, for example, combined use of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates and dialkyl ethers, combined use of diacetates and diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, or esters and butylene glycol alkyl ether acetate Preferably used in combination with a class.
 また、溶剤としては、沸点130℃以上160℃未満の溶剤、沸点160℃以上の溶剤、又は、これらの混合物であることが好ましい。
 沸点130℃以上160℃未満の溶剤としては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点146℃)、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点158℃)、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-ブチルエーテル(沸点155℃)、及び、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-プロピルエーテル(沸点131℃)が例示できる。
 沸点160℃以上の溶剤としては、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル(沸点170℃)、ジエチレングリコールメチルエチルエーテル(沸点176℃)、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルプロピオネート(沸点160℃)、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点213℃)、3-メトキシブチルエーテルアセテート(沸点171℃)、ジエチレングリコールジエチエルエーテル(沸点189℃)、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点162℃)、プロピレングリコールジアセテート(沸点190℃)、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点220℃)、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点175℃)、及び、1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート(沸点232℃)が例示できる。
The solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or more and less than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or more, or a mixture thereof.
As solvents having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or more and less than 160 ° C., propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.), Propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether (boiling point 131 ° C.) can be exemplified.
As solvents having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C.), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C.), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C.), dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate (Boiling point 213 ° C), 3-methoxybutyl ether acetate (boiling point 171 ° C), diethylene glycol diethyl ether (boiling point 189 ° C), diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 162 ° C), propylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 190 ° C), diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (Boiling point 220 ° C.), dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 175 ° C.), and 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 232 ° C.) There can be exemplified.
 感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する際における溶剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂組成物中の全固形分100質量部あたり、50質量部~1,900質量部であることが好ましく、100質量部~900質量部であることがより好ましい。
 また、後述する上記感光性樹脂層における溶剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対し、2質量%以下であることが好ましく、1質量%以下であることがより好ましく、0.5質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
When the photosensitive resin composition is applied, the content of the solvent is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass, and 100 parts by mass to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. More preferably, it is 900 parts by mass.
The content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin layer described later is preferably 2% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. It is more preferable that the content is not more than mass%.
<その他の添加剤>
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、特定潜在性色素、特定重合体及び光酸発生剤等の上記各成分に加え、必要に応じて公知の添加剤を含むことができる。
<Other additives>
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure can contain known additives, as necessary, in addition to the above-described components such as the specific latent dye, the specific polymer, and the photoacid generator.
-可塑剤-
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、可塑性を改良する目的で、可塑剤を含有してもよい。
 上記可塑剤は、特定重合体よりも重量平均分子量が小さいことが好ましい。
 可塑剤の重量平均分子量は、可塑性付与の観点から500以上10,000未満が好ましく、700以上5,000未満がより好ましく、800以上4,000未満が更に好ましい。
 可塑剤は、特定重合体と相溶して可塑性を発現する化合物であれば特に限定されないが、可塑性付与の観点から、可塑剤は、分子中にアルキレンオキシ基を有することが好ましい。可塑剤に含まれるアルキレンオキシ基は下記構造を有することが好ましい。
-Plasticizer-
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure may contain a plasticizer for the purpose of improving the plasticity.
It is preferable that the said plasticizer has a smaller weight average molecular weight than a specific polymer.
The weight average molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 500 or more and less than 10,000, more preferably 700 or more and less than 5,000, and still more preferably 800 or more and less than 4,000 from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity.
The plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the specific polymer to exhibit plasticity, but from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule. The alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer preferably has the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 上記式中、Rは炭素数2~8のアルキル基であり、nは1~50の整数を表し、*は他の原子との結合部位を表す。 In the above formulae, R is an alkyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, n is an integer of 1 to 50, and * represents a bonding site to another atom.
 なお、例えば、上記構造のアルキレンオキシ基を有する化合物(「化合物X」とする。)であっても、化合物X、特定潜在性色素、特定重合体及び光酸発生剤を混合して得た化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂組成物が、化合物Xを含まずに形成した化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂組成物に比べて可塑性が向上しない場合は、本開示における可塑剤には該当しない。例えば、任意に添加される界面活性剤は、一般に感光性樹脂組成物に可塑性をもたらす量で使用されることはないため、本明細書における可塑剤には該当しない。 In addition, for example, even a compound having an alkyleneoxy group of the above structure (referred to as “compound X”), a chemical obtained by mixing the compound X, a specific latent dye, a specific polymer, and a photoacid generator When the amplification positive photosensitive resin composition does not improve the plasticity as compared with the chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin composition formed without containing the compound X, it does not correspond to the plasticizer in the present disclosure. For example, surfactants that are optionally added do not fall under the plasticizers herein because they are not generally used in amounts that provide plasticity to the photosensitive resin composition.
 上記可塑剤としては、例えば、下記構造を有する化合物が挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 As said plasticizer, although the compound which has the following structure is mentioned, for example, it is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 可塑剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂組成物により形成される感光性樹脂層の密着性の観点から、上記感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、1質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、2質量%~20質量%であることがより好ましい。
 上記感光性樹脂組成物は、可塑剤を1種のみを含んでいてもよく、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
The content of the plasticizer is 1% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition from the viewpoint of the adhesion of the photosensitive resin layer formed of the photosensitive resin composition. Is preferable, and 2% by mass to 20% by mass is more preferable.
The photosensitive resin composition may contain only one type of plasticizer, or may contain two or more types.
-増感剤-
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、増感剤を更に含むことができる。
 増感剤は、活性光線を吸収して電子励起状態となる。電子励起状態となった増感剤は、光酸発生剤と接触して、電子移動、エネルギー移動、及び、発熱などの作用が生じる。これにより光酸発生剤は化学変化を起こして分解し、酸を生成する。
 増感剤を含有させることで、露光感度を向上させることができる。
-Sensitizer-
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure can further include a sensitizer.
The sensitizer absorbs an actinic ray to be in an electronically excited state. The sensitizer in the electronically excited state comes into contact with the photoacid generator to produce actions such as electron transfer, energy transfer and heat generation. Thus, the photoacid generator chemically changes and decomposes to generate an acid.
Exposure sensitivity can be improved by containing a sensitizer.
 増感剤としては、アントラセン誘導体、アクリドン誘導体、チオキサントン誘導体、クマリン誘導体、ベーススチリル誘導体、及び、ジスチリルベンゼン誘導体よりなる群からえらばれた化合物が好ましく、アントラセン誘導体がより好ましい。
 アントラセン誘導体としては、アントラセン、9,10-ジブトキシアントラセン、9,10-ジクロロアントラセン、2-エチル-9,10-ジメトキシアントラセン、9-ヒドロキシメチルアントラセン、9-ブロモアントラセン、9-クロロアントラセン、9,10-ジブロモアントラセン、2-エチルアントラセン、又は、9,10-ジメトキシアントラセンが好ましい。
As the sensitizer, compounds selected from the group consisting of anthracene derivatives, acridone derivatives, thioxanthone derivatives, coumarin derivatives, base styryl derivatives, and distyryl benzene derivatives are preferable, and anthracene derivatives are more preferable.
As the anthracene derivative, anthracene, 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene, 9,10-dichloroanthracene, 2-ethyl-9,10-dimethoxyanthracene, 9-hydroxymethylanthracene, 9-bromoanthracene, 9-chloroanthracene, 9 10-dibromoanthracene, 2-ethylanthracene or 9,10-dimethoxyanthracene is preferred.
 上記増感剤としては、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0139~段落0141に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 Examples of the sensitizer include the compounds described in paragraph 0139 to paragraph 0141 of WO 2015/093271.
 増感剤の含有量は、上記感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、0質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましい。 The content of the sensitizer is preferably 0% by mass to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. .
-ヘテロ環状化合物-
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、ヘテロ環状化合物を含むことができる。
 本開示におけるヘテロ環状化合物には、特に制限はない。例えば、以下に述べる分子内にエポキシ基又はオキセタニル基を有する化合物、アルコキシメチル基含有ヘテロ環状化合物、その他、各種環状エーテル、環状エステル(ラクトン)などの含酸素モノマー、環状アミン、オキサゾリンといった含窒素モノマー、更には珪素、硫黄、リンなどのd電子をもつヘテロ環モノマー等を添加することができる。
-Heterocyclic compounds-
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure can contain a heterocyclic compound.
There is no particular limitation on the heterocyclic compound in the present disclosure. For example, a compound having an epoxy group or an oxetanyl group in the molecule described below, an alkoxymethyl group-containing heterocyclic compound, various cyclic ethers, oxygen-containing monomers such as cyclic esters (lactones), nitrogen-containing monomers such as cyclic amines and oxazolines Furthermore, heterocyclic monomers having d electrons such as silicon, sulfur and phosphorus can be added.
 感光性樹脂組成物中におけるヘテロ環状化合物の含有量は、ヘテロ環状化合物を添加する場合には、上記感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、0.01質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましく、1質量%~5質量%であることが更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、密着性及びエッチング耐性の観点で好ましい。ヘテロ環状化合物は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を併用することもできる。 When the heterocyclic compound is added, the content of the heterocyclic compound in the photosensitive resin composition is 0.01% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. Is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, and more preferably 1% by mass to 5% by mass. It is preferable in the viewpoint of adhesiveness and etching tolerance as it is the said range. The heterocyclic compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物の具体例としては、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂等を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of the compound having an epoxy group in the molecule include bisphenol A epoxy resin, bisphenol F epoxy resin, phenol novolac epoxy resin, cresol novolac epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy resin and the like.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物は市販品として入手できる。例えば、JER828、JER1007、JER157S70(三菱化学(株)製)、JER157S65((株)三菱ケミカルホールディングス製)など、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0189に記載の市販品などが挙げられる。
 その他の市販品として、ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S、同EP-4003S、同EP-4010S、同EP-4011S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、NC-2000、NC-3000、NC-7300、XD-1000、EPPN-501、EPPN-502(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、デナコールEX-611、EX-612、EX-614、EX-614B、EX-622、EX-512、EX-521、EX-411、EX-421、EX-313、EX-314、EX-321、EX-211、EX-212、EX-810、EX-811、EX-850、EX-851、EX-821、EX-830、EX-832、EX-841、EX-911、EX-941、EX-920、EX-931、EX-212L、EX-214L、EX-216L、EX-321L、EX-850L、DLC-201、DLC-203、DLC-204、DLC-205、DLC-206、DLC-301、DLC-402、EX-111,EX-121、EX-141、EX-145、EX-146、EX-147、EX-171、EX-192(以上ナガセケムテック製)、YH-300、YH-301、YH-302、YH-315、YH-324、YH-325(以上、新日鐵住金化学(株)製)セロキサイド2021P、2081、2000、3000、EHPE3150、エポリードGT400、セルビナースB0134、B0177((株)ダイセル製)などが挙げられる。
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物は1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
Compounds having an epoxy group in the molecule are commercially available. For example, commercially available products described in paragraph 0189 of JP-A-2011-221494, such as JER 828, JER 1007, JER 157 S70 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), JER 157 S 65 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings), and the like can be mentioned.
Other commercially available products include ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S, EP-4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (all manufactured by ADEKA), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC-7300, XD- 1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (above, made by ADEKA Co., Ltd.), Denacol EX-611, EX-612, EX-614, EX-614B, EX-622, EX-512, EX-521, EX- 411, EX-421, EX-313, EX-314, EX-321, EX-211, EX-212, EX-810, EX-811, EX-850, EX-851, EX-821, EX-830, EX-832, EX-841, EX-911, EX-941, EX-920, EX-931, EX-212 , EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L, DLC-201, DLC-203, DLC-204, DLC-205, DLC-206, DLC-301, DLC-402, EX-111, EX -121, EX-141, EX-145, EX-146, EX-147, EX-171, EX-192 (manufactured by Nagase Chemtech Inc.), YH-300, YH-301, YH-302, YH-315, YH-324, YH-325 (all manufactured by Nippon Steel & Sumikin Chemical Co., Ltd.) Celoxide 2021 P, 2081, 2000, 3000, EHPE 3150, Epolide GT 400, Celliners B 0134, B 0177 (manufactured by Daicel Co., Ltd.) and the like.
The compound which has an epoxy group in a molecule may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物の中でも、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂及び脂肪族エポキシ樹脂がより好ましく挙げられ、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂が特に好ましく挙げられる。 Among the compounds having an epoxy group in the molecule, bisphenol A epoxy resin, bisphenol F epoxy resin, phenol novolac epoxy resin and aliphatic epoxy resin are more preferable, and aliphatic epoxy resin is particularly preferable.
 分子内にオキセタニル基を有する化合物の具体例としては、アロンオキセタンOXT-201、OXT-211、OXT-212、OXT-213、OXT-121、OXT-221、OX-SQ、PNOX(以上、東亞合成(株)製)を用いることができる。 Specific examples of the compound having an oxetanyl group in the molecule include alonoxetane OXT-201, OXT-211, OXT-212, OXT-213, OXT-121, OXT-221, OX-SQ, PNOX Co., Ltd. can be used.
 また、オキセタニル基を含む化合物は、単独で又はエポキシ基を含む化合物と混合して使用することが好ましい。 Moreover, it is preferable to use the compound containing an oxetanyl group individually or in mixture with the compound containing an epoxy group.
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物においては、ヘテロ環状化合物がエポキシ基を有する化合物であることが、得られるパターンのエッチング耐性及び線幅安定性の観点から好ましい。 In the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure, it is preferable that the heterocyclic compound is a compound having an epoxy group from the viewpoint of etching resistance and line width stability of the obtained pattern.
-アルコキシシラン化合物-
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、アルコキシシラン化合物を含有してもよい。アルコキシシラン化合物としては、トリアルコキシシラン化合物が好ましく挙げられる。
 アルコキシシラン化合物としては、例えば、γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルアルキルジアルコキシシラン、γ-メタクリロキシプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-メタクリロキシプロピルアルキルジアルコキシシラン、γ-クロロプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-メルカプトプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、β-(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル)エチルトリアルコキシシラン、ビニルトリアルコキシシランが挙げられる。これらのうち、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランやγ-メタクリロキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランがより好ましく、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランが更に好ましく、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシランが特に好ましい。これらは1種単独又は2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。
 アルコキシシラン化合物の含有量は、感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、0.1質量%~30質量%であることが好ましく、0.5質量%~20質量%であることがより好ましい。
-Alkoxysilane compound-
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure may contain an alkoxysilane compound. As an alkoxysilane compound, a trialkoxysilane compound is mentioned preferably.
As the alkoxysilane compound, for example, γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropyl alkyldialkoxysilane, γ-methacryloxypropyl Trialkoxysilane, γ-methacryloxypropyl alkyldialkoxysilane, γ-chloropropyltrialkoxysilane, γ-mercaptopropyltrialkoxysilane, β- (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrialkoxysilane, vinyltrialkoxysilane It can be mentioned. Among these, γ-glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane and γ-methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane are more preferable, γ-glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane is more preferable, and 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane is particularly preferable. preferable. These can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
The content of the alkoxysilane compound is preferably 0.1% by mass to 30% by mass, and more preferably 0.5% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. .
-界面活性剤-
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、膜厚均一性の観点から界面活性剤を含有することが好ましい。界面活性剤としては、アニオン系、カチオン系、ノニオン系(非イオン系)、又は、両性のいずれでも使用することができるが、好ましい界面活性剤はノニオン界面活性剤である。
 ノニオン系界面活性剤の例としては、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルフェニルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレングリコールの高級脂肪酸ジエステル類、シリコーン系、フッ素系界面活性剤を挙げることができる。また、以下商品名で、KP(信越化学工業(株)製)、ポリフロー(共栄社化学(株)製)、エフトップ(JEMCO社製)、メガファック(DIC(株)製)、フロラード(住友スリーエム(株)製)、アサヒガード、サーフロン(旭硝子(株)製)、PolyFox(OMNOVA社製)、及び、SH-8400(東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)等の各シリーズを挙げることができる。
 また、界面活性剤として、下記式I-1で表される構成単位A及び構成単位Bを含み、テトラヒドロフラン(THF)を溶剤とした場合のゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィーで測定されるポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)が1,000以上10,000以下である共重合体を好ましい例として挙げることができる。
-Surfactant-
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity. As the surfactant, any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
Examples of nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone surfactants, and fluorine surfactants. . In addition, KP (made by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), Polyflow (made by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), F-top (made by JEMCO), Megafac (made by DIC), Florard (Sumitomo 3M) under the following trade names. Each series may be mentioned, such as (manufactured by Co., Ltd.), Asahi Guard, Surfron (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox (manufactured by OMNOVA), and SH-8400 (manufactured by Toray Dow Corning).
Moreover, the weight average as polystyrene conversion measured by the gel permeation chromatography at the time of using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent, containing the structural unit A and the structural unit B represented by following formula I-1 as surfactant is used A copolymer having a molecular weight (Mw) of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less can be mentioned as a preferred example.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 式(I-1)中、R401及びR403はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、R402は炭素数1以上4以下の直鎖アルキレン基を表し、R404は水素原子又は炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基を表し、Lは炭素数3以上6以下のアルキレン基を表し、p及びqは重合比を表す質量百分率であり、pは10質量%以上80質量%以下の数値を表し、qは20質量%以上90質量%以下の数値を表し、rは1以上18以下の整数を表し、sは1以上10以下の整数を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。 In formula (I-1), each of R 401 and R 403 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 402 represents a linear alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 404 represents a hydrogen atom or carbon L represents an alkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, p and q each represent a polymerization percentage, and p represents a numerical value of 10% to 80% by mass. Q represents a numerical value of 20% to 90% by mass, r represents an integer of 1 to 18 and s represents an integer of 1 to 10, and * represents a binding site to another structure Represent.
 Lは、下記式(I-2)で表される分岐アルキレン基であることが好ましい。式(I-2)におけるR405は、炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基を表し、相溶性と被塗布面に対する濡れ性の点で、炭素数1以上3以下のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数2又は3のアルキル基がより好ましい。pとqとの和(p+q)は、p+q=100、すなわち、100質量%であることが好ましい。 L is preferably a branched alkylene group represented by the following formula (I-2). R 405 in the formula (I-2) represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and in view of compatibility and wettability to the coated surface, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is preferable, and the carbon number is Two or three alkyl groups are more preferred. The sum of p and q (p + q) is preferably p + q = 100, that is, 100% by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 共重合体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、1,500以上5,000以下がより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer is more preferably 1,500 or more and 5,000 or less.
 その他、特許第4502784号公報の段落0017、特開2009-237362号公報の段落0060~段落0071に記載の界面活性剤も用いることができる。 In addition, surfactants described in paragraph 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraph 0060 to paragraph 0071 of JP2009-237362A can also be used.
 界面活性剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 界面活性剤の添加量は、上記感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、10質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.001質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましく、0.01質量%~3質量%であることが更に好ましい。
The surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass, with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. It is more preferable that the content be from 01% by mass to 3% by mass.
-その他の成分-
 本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物には、金属酸化物粒子、酸化防止剤、分散剤、酸増殖剤、現像促進剤、導電性繊維、着色剤、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、熱酸発生剤、紫外線吸収剤、増粘剤、及び、有機又は無機の沈殿防止剤などの公知の添加剤を更に加えることができる。
 その他の成分の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0165~段落0184にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
-Other ingredients-
The photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure includes metal oxide particles, an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid multiplication agent, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a colorant, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a thermal acid generator, Further known additives such as UV absorbers, thickeners and organic or inorganic suspending agents can be added.
Preferred embodiments of the other components are described in paragraphs [0165] to [0184] of JP-A-2014-85643, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
(感光性転写材料)
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、仮支持体と、感光性樹脂層とを有し、上記感光性樹脂層が、カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体、光酸発生剤、及び、共役酸のpKaが4.5未満又は共役酸を形成しない化合物であり、かつ発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が500nm以上である潜在性色素を含有し、仮支持体と、感光性樹脂層とを有し、上記感光性樹脂層が、本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物を含むことが好ましい。
(Photosensitive transfer material)
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support and a photosensitive resin layer, and the photosensitive resin layer contains a structural unit having a group in which a carboxylic acid group is protected by an acid-degradable group. Polymers, photoacid generators, and compounds that do not have a pKa of less than 4.5 or conjugate acids, and have a maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm during color development It is preferable that it contains a dye, has a temporary support, and a photosensitive resin layer, and the photosensitive resin layer contains the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure.
 図1は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を概略的に示している。図1に示す感光性転写材料100は、仮支持体10と、中間層12と、感光性樹脂層14と、カバーフィルム16とがこの順に積層されている。
 感光性樹脂層14は、カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体、光酸発生剤、及び、共役酸のpKaが4.5未満又は共役酸を形成しない化合物であり、かつ発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が500nm以上である潜在性色素を含有する。
 以下、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の構成材料等について説明する。なお、本開示における上記構成について本明細書では以下のように称する場合がある。
 酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体を「特定重合体」と称する場合がある。
 上記感光性樹脂層は、ポジ型の感光性樹脂層であり、「ポジ型感光性樹脂層」と称する場合がある。
FIG. 1 schematically shows an example of the layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. In the photosensitive transfer material 100 shown in FIG. 1, a temporary support 10, an intermediate layer 12, a photosensitive resin layer 14, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
The photosensitive resin layer 14 is a polymer having a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, a photoacid generator, and a conjugated acid having a pKa of less than 4.5 or a conjugated acid. It is a compound which is not formed, and contains a latent dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm in color development.
Hereinafter, constituent materials and the like of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described. In the present specification, the above configuration in the present disclosure may be referred to as follows.
The polymer which has a structural unit which has an acidic radical protected by an acid degradable group may be called a "specific polymer."
The said photosensitive resin layer is a positive photosensitive resin layer, and may be called a "positive photosensitive resin layer."
<仮支持体>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、仮支持体を有する。
 仮支持体は、感光性樹脂層を支持し、剥離可能な支持体である。
 本開示に用いられる仮支持体は、感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する際に仮支持体を介して感光性樹脂層を露光し得る観点から光透過性を有することが好ましい。
 光透過性を有するとは、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率が50%以上であることを意味し、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率は、露光感度向上の観点から、60%以上が好ましく、70%以上がより好ましい。透過率の測定方法としては、大塚電子(株)製MCPD Seriesを用いて測定する方法が挙げられる。
 仮支持体としては、ガラス基板、樹脂フィルム、紙等が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性等の観点から、樹脂フィルムが特に好ましい。樹脂フィルムとしては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム等が挙げられる。中でも、2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが特に好ましい。
<Temporary support>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support.
The temporary support is a support that supports the photosensitive resin layer and can be peeled off.
The temporary support used in the present disclosure preferably has light transmittance from the viewpoint of being able to expose the photosensitive resin layer through the temporary support when the photosensitive resin layer is subjected to pattern exposure.
Having light transmission means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is a viewpoint of improving exposure sensitivity. Therefore, 60% or more is preferable, and 70% or more is more preferable. As a measuring method of the transmittance | permeability, the method of measuring using Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd. product MCPD Series is mentioned.
As a temporary support body, a glass substrate, a resin film, paper etc. are mentioned, A resin film is especially preferable from a viewpoint of intensity | strength, flexibility, etc. As a resin film, a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, a polycarbonate film etc. are mentioned. Among them, biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
 仮支持体の厚みは、特に限定されず、5μm~200μmの範囲が好ましく、取扱い易さ、汎用性などの点で、10μm~150μmの範囲がより好ましい。
 仮支持体の厚みは、支持体としての強度、回路配線形成用基板との貼り合わせに求められる可撓性、最初の露光工程で要求される光透過性などの観点から、材質に応じて選択すればよい。
The thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, and is preferably in the range of 5 μm to 200 μm, and more preferably in the range of 10 μm to 150 μm in terms of handleability, versatility and the like.
The thickness of the temporary support is selected according to the material from the viewpoint of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding to a circuit wiring formation substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure step, etc. do it.
 仮支持体の好ましい態様については、例えば、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0017~段落0018に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The preferred embodiment of the temporary support is described, for example, in paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP-A-2014-85643, and the contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
<感光性樹脂層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、感光性樹脂層を有し、上記感光性樹脂層が、カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体、光酸発生剤、及び、共役酸のpKaが4.5未満又は共役酸を形成しない化合物であり、かつ発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が500nm以上である潜在性色素を含有する。
 上記感光性樹脂層は、本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物により形成された層であることが好ましい。
 また、上記感光性樹脂層は、本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物を含むことが好ましい。
 また、本開示における感光性樹脂層は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層であり、化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂層であることが好ましい。
 後述するオニウム塩やオキシムスルホネート化合物等の光酸発生剤は、活性放射線(活性光線)に感応して生成される酸が、上記特定重合体中の保護された酸基の脱保護に対して触媒として作用するので、1個の光量子の作用で生成した酸が、多数の脱保護反応に寄与し、量子収率は1を超え、例えば、10の数乗のような大きい値となり、いわゆる化学増幅の結果として、高感度が得られる。
 一方、活性放射線に感応する光酸発生剤としてキノンジアジド化合物を用いた場合、逐次型光化学反応によりカルボキシ基を生成するが、その量子収率は必ず1以下であり、化学増幅型には該当しない。
<Photosensitive resin layer>
A photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a photosensitive resin layer, and the photosensitive resin layer contains a structural unit having a group in which a carboxylic acid group is protected with an acid-degradable group, a photoacid It contains a generator and a latent dye having a pKa of less than 4.5 of a conjugate acid or a compound which does not form a conjugate acid and having a maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm or more in a wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at color development.
The photosensitive resin layer is preferably a layer formed of the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure.
Moreover, it is preferable that the said photosensitive resin layer contains the photosensitive resin composition which concerns on this indication.
In addition, the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure is a positive photosensitive resin layer, and is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer.
The photo acid generators such as onium salts and oxime sulfonate compounds described later are prepared by using an acid generated in response to actinic radiation (active light) as a catalyst for the deprotection of the protected acid group in the specific polymer. Since the acid generated by the action of one photon contributes to a large number of deprotection reactions, the quantum yield is greater than 1, for example, a large value such as a power of 10, so-called chemical amplification High sensitivity is obtained as a result of
On the other hand, when a quinonediazide compound is used as a photoacid generator sensitive to actinic radiation, a carboxy group is produced by successive photochemical reactions, but its quantum yield is necessarily 1 or less and does not fall under the chemical amplification type.
 上記感光性樹脂層におけるカルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体、光酸発生剤、及び、共役酸のpKaが4.5未満又は共役酸を形成しない化合物であり、かつ発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が500nm以上である潜在性色素はそれぞれ、上記感光性樹脂組成物におけるカルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体、光酸発生剤、及び、共役酸のpKaが4.5未満又は共役酸を形成しない化合物であり、かつ発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が500nm以上である潜在性色素と同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 また、上記感光性樹脂層は、上記溶剤以外の上記感光性樹脂組成物における各成分を好ましく含有することができる。
 更に、上記感光性樹脂層において、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対する各成分の好ましい含有量は、上記感光性樹脂組成物における、上記感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分に対する各成分の好ましい含有量と同様である。
A polymer containing a structural unit having a group in which the carboxylic acid group in the photosensitive resin layer is protected by an acid-degradable group, a photoacid generator, and a pKa of a conjugate acid of less than 4.5 or a conjugate acid The latent dyes having a maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development are each a group in which the carboxylic acid group in the photosensitive resin composition is protected with an acid degradable group. A polymer having a structural unit, a photoacid generator, and a compound having a pKa of less than 4.5 of a conjugated acid or not forming a conjugated acid, and a maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm in a wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at color development It is synonymous with the latent dye which is the above, and its preferable aspect is also the same.
Moreover, the said photosensitive resin layer can preferably contain each component in the said photosensitive resin composition other than the said solvent.
Furthermore, in the photosensitive resin layer, the preferable content of each component with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer is a preferable content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition in the photosensitive resin composition. Similar to the amount.
-感光性樹脂層の厚み-
 上記感光性樹脂層の厚みは、0.5μm~20μmが好ましい。感光性樹脂層の厚みが20μm以下であると得られるパターンの解像度が良好であり、0.5μm以上であるとパターン直線性の観点から好ましい。
 感光性樹脂層の厚みとしては、0.8μm~15μmがより好ましく、1.0μm~10μmが特に好ましい。
-Thickness of photosensitive resin layer-
The thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.5 μm to 20 μm. The resolution of the pattern obtained when the thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is 20 μm or less is good, and the thickness of 0.5 μm or more is preferable from the viewpoint of pattern linearity.
The thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is more preferably 0.8 μm to 15 μm, and particularly preferably 1.0 μm to 10 μm.
-感光性樹脂層の形成方法-
 各成分、及び、溶剤を所定の割合でかつ任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解して感光性樹脂層を形成するための感光性樹脂組成物を調製することができる。例えば、各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液を所定の割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、孔径0.2μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過した後に、使用に供することもできる。
-Method of forming photosensitive resin layer-
The photosensitive resin composition for forming a photosensitive resin layer can be prepared by mixing each component and a solvent in a predetermined ratio and using an arbitrary method and stirring and dissolving. For example, after preparing each solution as a solution in which each component is previously dissolved in a solvent, the resulting solution can be mixed at a predetermined ratio to prepare a composition. The composition prepared as described above can also be used after being filtered using a filter with a pore size of 0.2 μm or the like.
 感光性樹脂組成物を仮支持体に塗布し、乾燥させることで、仮支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する本開示に係る感光性転写材料を得ることができる。
 塗布方法は特に限定されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、インクジェット塗布などの公知の方法で塗布することができる。
 なお、仮支持体上に後述のその他の層を有する仮支持体とその他の層との積層体上に、感光性樹脂層を塗布することもできる。
A photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having a photosensitive resin layer on a temporary support can be obtained by applying the photosensitive resin composition to the temporary support and drying.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, or ink jet coating.
In addition, a photosensitive resin layer can also be apply | coated on the laminated body of the temporary support body which has the below-mentioned other layer on a temporary support body, and another layer.
<その他の層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記感光性樹脂層以外の層(以下、「その他の層」と称することがある)を有していてもよい。その他の層としては、コントラストエンハンスメント層、中間層、カバーフィルム、熱可塑性樹脂層等を挙げることができる。
<Other layers>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a layer (hereinafter, may be referred to as "other layer") other than the photosensitive resin layer. Other layers include a contrast enhancement layer, an intermediate layer, a cover film, a thermoplastic resin layer and the like.
<コントラストエンハンスメント層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記感光性樹脂層に加え、コントラストエンハンスメント層を有することができる。
 コントラストエンハンスメント層(Contrast Enhancement Layer;CEL)は、露光前には露光波長に対する吸収が大きいが、露光されるに伴って次第に吸収が小さくなる、すなわち、光の透過率が高くなる材料(光消色性色素成分と称する)を含有する層である。光消色性色素成分としては、ジアゾニウム塩、スチルバゾリウム塩、アリールニトロソ塩類等が知られている。被膜形成成分としては、フェノール系樹脂等が用いられる。
 その他、コントラストエンハンスメント層としては、特開平6-97065号公報の段落0004~段落0051、特開平6-332167号公報の段落0012~段落0055、フォトポリマーハンドブック,フォトポリマー懇話会編,工業調査会(1989)、フォトポリマー・テクノロジー,山岡、永松編,(株)日刊工業新聞社(1988)に記載の材料を用いることができる。
<Contrast enhancement layer>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can have a contrast enhancement layer in addition to the photosensitive resin layer.
A material with a contrast enhancement layer (Contrast Enhancement Layer; CEL) that absorbs significantly to the exposure wavelength before exposure but gradually decreases as it is exposed, that is, the light transmittance increases (photo-decoloring (Referred to as a sex pigment component). As the photobleachable dye component, diazonium salts, stilbazolium salts, aryl nitroso salts and the like are known. A phenolic resin etc. are used as a film formation component.
In addition, as a contrast enhancement layer, paragraphs 0004 to 0051 of JP-A-6-97065, paragraphs 0012 to 0055 of JP-A-6-332167, a photopolymer handbook, a photopolymer conference, an industry survey 1989), Photopolymer Technology, Yamaoka, Nagamatsu ed., Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun Co., Ltd. (1988) can be used.
<中間層>
 上記感光性樹脂層の上に、複数層を塗布する目的、及び、塗布後の保存の際における成分の混合を防止する目的で、中間層を設けることができる。
 中間層としては、特開2005-259138号公報の段落0084~0087に記載の中間層を用いることができる。中間層としては、水又はアルカリ水溶液に分散又は溶解するものが好ましい。
 中間層に用いられる材料としては、例えばポリビニルアルコール系樹脂、ポリビニルピロリドン系樹脂、セルロース系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレンオキサイド系樹脂、ゼラチン、ビニルエーテル系樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、及びこれらの共重合体などの樹脂が挙げられる。中でも特に好ましいのはポリビニルアルコールとポリビニルピロリドンとの組合せである。
<Middle class>
An intermediate layer can be provided on the photosensitive resin layer for the purpose of applying a plurality of layers and for the purpose of preventing the mixing of the components during storage after application.
As the intermediate layer, the intermediate layers described in paragraphs 0084 to 0087 of JP-A-2005-259138 can be used. As the intermediate layer, those which are dispersed or dissolved in water or an aqueous alkali solution are preferable.
Materials used for the intermediate layer include, for example, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinyl pyrrolidone resins, cellulose resins, acrylamide resins, polyethylene oxide resins, gelatin, vinyl ether resins, polyamide resins, and copolymers of these. Resin is mentioned. Among them, particularly preferred is a combination of polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl pyrrolidone.
<熱可塑性樹脂層、カバーフィルム等>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、例えば、仮支持体と、熱可塑性樹脂層と、感光性樹脂層とをこの順で有することもできる。更に、感光性樹脂層を保護する目的でカバーフィルムを有していてもよい。
 熱可塑性樹脂層の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0189~段落0193、他の層の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0194~段落0196にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Thermoplastic resin layer, cover film etc.>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can also have, for example, a temporary support, a thermoplastic resin layer, and a photosensitive resin layer in this order. Furthermore, you may have a cover film in order to protect the photosensitive resin layer.
Preferred embodiments of the thermoplastic resin layer are described in paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP-A-2014-85643, and preferred embodiments of the other layers are described in paragraphs 0194 to 0-196 of JP-A-2014-85643, respectively. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料が、熱可塑性樹脂層等のその他の層を有する場合、特開2006-259138号公報の段落0094~段落0098に記載の感光性転写材料の作製方法に準じて作製することができる。
 例えば、熱可塑性樹脂層及び中間層を有する本開示に係る感光性転写材料を作製する場合には、仮支持体上に、熱可塑性の有機高分子と添加剤とを溶解した溶解液(熱可塑性樹脂層用塗布液)を塗布し、乾燥させて熱可塑性樹脂層を設けた後、得られた熱可塑性樹脂層上に熱可塑性樹脂層を溶解しない溶剤に樹脂及び添加剤を加えて調製した調製液(中間層用塗布液)を塗布し、乾燥させて中間層を積層する。形成した中間層上に、更に、中間層を溶解しない溶剤を用いて調製した本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物を塗布し、乾燥させて感光性樹脂層を積層することによって、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を好適に作製することができる。
When the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has another layer such as a thermoplastic resin layer, it is produced according to the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material described in paragraph 0094 to paragraph 0098 of JP-A-2006-259138. can do.
For example, when preparing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having a thermoplastic resin layer and an intermediate layer, a solution obtained by dissolving a thermoplastic organic polymer and an additive on a temporary support (thermoplastic Coating solution for resin layer) is applied and dried to form a thermoplastic resin layer, and then a resin and an additive are added to a solvent which does not dissolve the thermoplastic resin layer on the obtained thermoplastic resin layer. The solution (coating solution for intermediate layer) is applied and dried to laminate the intermediate layer. Furthermore, according to the present disclosure, the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure prepared using a solvent that does not dissolve the intermediate layer is applied onto the formed intermediate layer, and the photosensitive resin composition is laminated to form a photosensitive resin layer. A photosensitive transfer material can be suitably produced.
(回路配線の製造方法)
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いた、回路配線の製造方法の第1の実施態様について説明する。
 回路配線の製造方法の第1の実施態様は、
 基板に対し、本実開示に係る感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層を上記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)と、
 上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)と、
 上記露光する工程後の感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程(現像工程)と、
 上記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)と、をこの順に含む。
 回路配線の製造方法の第1の実施態様における基板は、ガラス、シリコン、フィルムなどの基材上に、所望の導電層などの層が設けられた基板であってもよい。
 回路配線の製造方法の第1の実施態様によれば、基板表面に微細パターンを形成することができる。
(Method of manufacturing circuit wiring)
A first embodiment of a method of manufacturing a circuit wiring using a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described.
The first embodiment of the method of manufacturing circuit wiring
A step of bringing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure into contact with the substrate and bonding the substrate to the substrate (bonding step);
Exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the attaching step to a pattern (exposure step);
Developing the photosensitive resin layer after the exposing step to form a pattern (developing step);
Etching the substrate in the region where the pattern is not disposed (etching step) in this order.
The substrate in the first embodiment of the method for producing a circuit wiring may be a substrate provided with a layer such as a desired conductive layer on a substrate such as glass, silicon, or film.
According to the first embodiment of the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring, a fine pattern can be formed on the substrate surface.
 回路配線の製造方法の第2の実施形態は、
 基材、及び、互いに構成材料が異なる第1導電層及び第2導電層を含む複数の導電層とを有し、上記基材の表面上に、上記基材の表面から遠い順に、最表面層である上記第1導電層及び上記第2導電層が積層されている基板に対し、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層を上記第1導電層に接触させて貼り合わせる貼り合わせ工程と、
 上記貼り合わせ工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記仮支持体を介して上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する第1露光工程と、
 上記第1露光工程後の感光性樹脂層から上記仮支持体を剥離した後、上記第1露光工程後の感光性樹脂層を現像して第1パターンを形成する第1現像工程と、
 上記第1パターンが配置されていない領域における上記複数の導電層のうち少なくとも上記第1導電層及び上記第2導電層をエッチング処理する第1エッチング工程と、
 上記第1エッチング工程後の上記第1パターンを上記第1パターンとは異なるパターンでパターン露光する第2露光工程と、
 上記第2露光工程後の上記第1パターンを現像して第2パターンを形成する第2現像工程と、
 上記第2パターンが配置されていない領域における上記複数の導電層のうち少なくとも上記第1導電層をエッチング処理する第2エッチング工程と、をこの順に含む。上記第2の実施形態としては、国際公開第2006/190405号を参考にすることができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
The second embodiment of the method of manufacturing circuit wiring is:
A substrate, and a plurality of conductive layers including a first conductive layer and a second conductive layer which are different in constituent material from each other, and the outermost surface layer on the surface of the substrate in order from the surface of the substrate Bonding the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure to the first conductive layer in contact with the substrate on which the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer are laminated. Process,
A first exposure step of subjecting the photosensitive resin layer to pattern exposure through the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material after the laminating step;
A first development step of developing the photosensitive resin layer after the first exposure step to form a first pattern after peeling off the temporary support from the photosensitive resin layer after the first exposure step;
A first etching step of etching at least the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer among the plurality of conductive layers in a region where the first pattern is not disposed;
A second exposure step of exposing the first pattern after the first etching step to a pattern different from the first pattern;
A second developing step of developing the first pattern after the second exposure step to form a second pattern;
And a second etching step of etching at least the first conductive layer among the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the second pattern is not disposed. The second embodiment can be referred to WO 2006/190405, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、タッチパネル又はタッチパネル表示装置用の回路配線の製造方法として用いることができる。
 以下、第2の実施形態を元に、各工程の詳細について説明する。
The method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure can be used as a method of manufacturing a circuit wiring for a touch panel or a touch panel display device.
The details of each step will be described below based on the second embodiment.
<貼り合わせ工程>
 貼り合わせ工程の一例を、図2(a)に概略的に示した。
 まず、貼り合わせ工程では、基材22と、互いに構成材料が異なる第1導電層24及び第2導電層26を含む複数の導電層とを有し、基材22の表面上に、基材22の表面から遠い順に、最表面層である第1導電層24と第2導電層26とが積層されている基板(回路配線形成用基板)20に対し、上述した本開示に係る感光性転写材料100のポジ型感光性樹脂層14を第1導電層24に接触させて貼り合わせる。なお、このような回路配線形成用基板と感光性転写材料との貼り合わせを「転写」又は「ラミネート」と称する場合がある。
<Lamination process>
An example of the bonding step is schematically shown in FIG. 2 (a).
First, in the bonding step, the base material 22 and a plurality of conductive layers including the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 which are different in constituent material from each other are provided. The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure described above with respect to the substrate (substrate for circuit wiring formation) 20 on which the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 as the outermost surface layer are stacked in order from the surface of The positive photosensitive resin layer 14 of 100 is brought into contact with the first conductive layer 24 and attached. In addition, bonding of such a substrate for circuit wiring formation and photosensitive transfer material may be called "transfer" or "lamination."
 図1に示したように感光性転写材料100のポジ型感光性樹脂層14上にカバーフィルム16を有する場合は、感光性転写材料100(ポジ型感光性樹脂層14)からカバーフィルム16を除去した後、感光性転写材料100のポジ型感光性樹脂層14を第1導電層24に接触させて貼り合わせる。
 感光性転写材料の第1導電層上への貼り合わせ(転写)は、感光性転写材料のポジ型感光性樹脂層側を第1導電層の上に重ね、ロール等による加圧及び加熱することに行われることが好ましい。貼り合わせには、ラミネータ、真空ラミネータ、及び、より生産性を高めることができるオートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネータを使用することができる。
 回路配線形成用基板の基材が樹脂フィルムである場合は、ロールツーロールでの貼り合わせも行うこともできる。
As shown in FIG. 1, when the cover film 16 is provided on the positive photosensitive resin layer 14 of the photosensitive transfer material 100, the cover film 16 is removed from the photosensitive transfer material 100 (positive photosensitive resin layer 14). After that, the positive photosensitive resin layer 14 of the photosensitive transfer material 100 is brought into contact with the first conductive layer 24 and attached.
Bonding (transfer) of the photosensitive transfer material onto the first conductive layer is performed by overlapping the positive photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material on the first conductive layer and applying pressure and heat with a roll or the like. Preferably to be performed. For lamination, known laminators such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator capable of further enhancing productivity can be used.
When the base material of the circuit wiring formation substrate is a resin film, bonding by roll-to-roll can also be performed.
〔基材〕
 基材上に複数の導電層が積層された基板は、基材がガラス基材又はフィルム基材であることが好ましく、フィルム基材であることがより好ましい。本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、タッチパネル用の回路配線である場合、基材がシート状樹脂組成物であることが特に好ましい。
 また、基材は透明であることが好ましい。
 基材の屈折率は、1.50~1.52であることが好ましい。
 基材は、ガラス基材等の透光性基材で構成されていてもよく、コーニング社のゴリラガラスに代表される強化ガラスなどを用いることができる。また、前述の透明基材としては、特開2010-86684号公報、特開2010-152809号公報及び特開2010-257492号公報に用いられている材料を好ましく用いることができる。
 基材としてフィルム基材を用いる場合は、光学的に歪みがない基材、及び、透明度が高い基材を用いることがより好ましく、具体的な素材には、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(polyethylene terephthalate;PET)、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリカーボネート、トリアセチルセルロース、シクロオレフィンポリマーをあげることができる。
〔Base material〕
The substrate in which a plurality of conductive layers are laminated on a substrate is preferably a glass substrate or a film substrate, and more preferably a film substrate. When the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring for a touch panel, it is particularly preferable that the base material is a sheet-like resin composition.
Moreover, it is preferable that a base material is transparent.
The refractive index of the substrate is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
The substrate may be made of a translucent substrate such as a glass substrate, and for example, tempered glass represented by Gorilla glass of Corning Co., Ltd. can be used. Further, as the above-mentioned transparent base material, materials used in JP-A-2010-86684, JP-A-2010-152809 and JP-A-2010-257492 can be preferably used.
In the case of using a film substrate as the substrate, it is more preferable to use a substrate having no optical distortion and a substrate having high transparency, and for a specific material, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), Examples include polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose and cycloolefin polymers.
〔導電層〕
 基材上に形成されている複数の導電層としては、一般的な回路配線又はタッチパネル配線に用いられる任意の導電層を挙げることができる。
 導電層の材料としては、金属及び金属酸化物などを挙げることができる。
 金属酸化物としては、ITO(Indium Tin Oxide)、IZO(Indium Zinc Oxide)、SiO等を挙げることができる。金属としては、Al、Zn、Cu、Fe、Ni、Cr、Mo等を挙げることができる。
[Conductive layer]
Examples of the plurality of conductive layers formed on the substrate include any conductive layer used for general circuit wiring or touch panel wiring.
Examples of the material of the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides.
As the metal oxide, ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), may be mentioned SiO 2 and the like. Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, Mo and the like.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、複数の導電層のうち少なくとも一つの導電層が金属酸化物を含むことが好ましい。
 導電層としては、静電容量型タッチパネルに用いられる視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン又は周辺取り出し部の配線であることが好ましい。
In the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, at least one of the plurality of conductive layers preferably includes a metal oxide.
As a conductive layer, it is preferable that it is an electrode pattern corresponded to the sensor of the visual recognition part used for an electrostatic capacitance type touch panel, or wiring of a periphery extraction part.
〔回路配線形成用基板〕
 基材の表面に導電層を有する基板である。導電層をパターンニングすることで回路配線とする。本例では、PETなどのフィルム基材に金属酸化物や金属などの複数の導電層が設けられたものであることが好ましい。
[Substrate for forming circuit wiring]
It is a substrate which has a conductive layer on the surface of a substrate. The conductive layer is patterned to form a circuit wiring. In this example, it is preferable that a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxides and metals be provided on a film substrate such as PET.
<露光工程(第1露光工程)>
 上記第1の実施態様においては露光工程が、上記第2の実施態様においては第1露光工程が行われる。露光工程(第1露光工程)の一例を、図2(b)に概略的に示した。
 露光工程(第1露光工程)では、貼り合わせ工程後の感光性転写材料の仮支持体12を介してポジ型感光性樹脂層14をパターン露光する。
<Exposing step (first exposing step)>
In the first embodiment, the exposure step is performed, and in the second embodiment, the first exposure step is performed. An example of the exposure process (first exposure process) is schematically shown in FIG.
In the exposure step (first exposure step), the positive photosensitive resin layer 14 is pattern-exposed through the temporary support 12 of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step.
 本開示における露光工程、現像工程、及びその他の工程の例としては、特開2006-23696号公報の段落0035~段落0051に記載の方法を本開示においても好適に用いることができる。 As examples of the exposure step, the development step and other steps in the present disclosure, the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
 例えば、第1導電層24の上に配置された感光性転写材料100の上方(第1導電層24と接する側とは反対側)に所定のパターンを有するマスク30を配置し、その後、マスク30を介してマスク上方から紫外線で露光する方法などが挙げられる。
 本開示においてパターンの詳細な配置及び具体的サイズは特に限定されない。本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を有する入力装置を備えた表示装置(例えばタッチパネル)の表示品質を高め、また、取り出し配線の占める面積をできるだけ小さくしたいことから、パターンの少なくとも一部(特にタッチパネルの電極パターン及び取り出し配線の部分)は100μm以下の細線であることが好ましく、70μm以下であることが更に好ましい。
 ここで、露光に使用する光源としては、感光性転写材料の露光された箇所が現像液に溶解しうる波長域の光(例えば、365nm、405nmなど)を照射できれば適宜選定して用いることができる。具体的には、超高圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、メタルハライドランプ等が挙げられる。
 露光量としては、好ましくは5mJ/cm~200mJ/cm程度であり、より好ましくは10mJ/cm~100mJ/cm程度である。
 また、露光後にパターンの矩形性、直線性を向上させる目的で、現像前に熱処理を行うことも好ましい。いわゆるPEB(Post Exposure Bake)と呼ばれる工程により、露光時に感光性樹脂層中で生じた定在波によるパターンエッジの荒れを低減することが可能である。
For example, a mask 30 having a predetermined pattern is disposed above the photosensitive transfer material 100 disposed on the first conductive layer 24 (the side opposite to the side in contact with the first conductive layer 24), and then the mask 30 is formed. And exposure to ultraviolet light from above the mask.
In the present disclosure, the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited. Since it is desirable to improve the display quality of a display device (for example, a touch panel) provided with an input device having a circuit wiring manufactured by the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure and to minimize the area occupied by the extraction wiring It is preferable that at least a part (particularly, the electrode pattern of the touch panel and the part of the lead-out wiring) be a thin line of 100 μm or less, and more preferably 70 μm or less.
Here, as a light source used for exposure, it can be appropriately selected and used as long as it can emit light (for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.) in a wavelength range in which the exposed portion of the photosensitive transfer material can dissolve in the developer. . Specifically, an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp and the like can be mentioned.
The exposure dose is preferably about 5 mJ / cm 2 to 200 mJ / cm 2 , and more preferably about 10 mJ / cm 2 to 100 mJ / cm 2 .
Further, it is also preferable to carry out heat treatment before development for the purpose of improving the rectangularity and linearity of the pattern after exposure. By means of a process called so-called PEB (Post Exposure Bake), it is possible to reduce roughness of the pattern edge due to standing waves generated in the photosensitive resin layer at the time of exposure.
 なお、パターン露光は、仮支持体を感光性樹脂層から剥離してから行っても、仮支持体を剥離する前に、仮支持体を介して露光し、その後、仮支持体を剥離してもよい。感光性樹脂層とマスクの接触によるマスク汚染の防止や、マスクに付着した異物による露光への影響を避けるためには、仮支持体を剥離せずに露光することが好ましい。なお、パターン露光は、マスクを介した露光でもよいし、レーザー等を用いたデジタル露光でもよい。 In addition, even if pattern exposure is performed after peeling a temporary support from a photosensitive resin layer, before peeling a temporary support, it exposes through a temporary support, and peels a temporary support after that. It is also good. In order to prevent the contamination of the mask due to the contact between the photosensitive resin layer and the mask, and to avoid the influence on the exposure by the foreign matter attached to the mask, it is preferable to perform the exposure without peeling off the temporary support. The pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
<現像工程(第1現像工程)>
 上記第1の実施態様においては現像工程が、上記第2の実施態様においては第1現像工程が行われる。現像工程(第1現像工程)の一例を、図2(c)に概略的に示した。
 現像工程(第1現像工程)では、露光工程(第1露光工程)後のポジ型感光性樹脂層14から仮支持体12を剥離した後、露光工程(第1露光工程)後のポジ型感光性樹脂層14を現像して第1パターン14Aを形成する。
<Development Process (First Development Process)>
In the first embodiment, the developing step is performed, and in the second embodiment, the first developing step is performed. An example of the developing step (first developing step) is schematically shown in FIG. 2 (c).
In the developing step (first developing step), after the temporary support 12 is peeled off from the positive photosensitive resin layer 14 after the exposing step (first exposing step), the positive photosensitive after the exposing step (first exposing step) The conductive resin layer 14 is developed to form a first pattern 14A.
 現像工程(第1現像工程)は、パターン露光されたポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像することによりパターン(第1パターン)を形成する工程である。
 パターン露光されたポジ型感光性樹脂層の現像は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。
 現像液としては、ポジ型感光性樹脂層の露光部分を除去することができれば特に制限はなく、例えば、特開平5-72724号公報に記載の現像液など、公知の現像液を使用することができる。尚、現像液はポジ型感光性樹脂層の露光部が溶解型の現像挙動をする現像液が好ましい。例えば、pKa=7~13の化合物を0.05mol/L(リットル)~5mol/Lの濃度で含むアルカリ水溶液系の現像液が好ましい。現像液は、さらに、水と混和性を有する有機溶剤、界面活性剤等を含有してもよい。本開示において好適に用いられる現像液としては、例えば、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0194に記載の現像液が挙げられる。
The developing step (first developing step) is a step of forming a pattern (first pattern) by developing the positive photosensitive resin layer which has been subjected to the pattern exposure.
The development of the pattern-exposed positive photosensitive resin layer can be performed using a developer.
The developer is not particularly limited as long as the exposed portion of the positive photosensitive resin layer can be removed, and for example, a known developer such as a developer described in JP-A-5-72724 may be used. it can. The developing solution is preferably a developing solution in which the exposed part of the positive photosensitive resin layer has a dissolution type developing behavior. For example, a developing solution of an aqueous alkali solution system containing a compound of pKa = 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L is preferable. The developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water, a surfactant, and the like. As a developing solution preferably used in the present disclosure, for example, a developing solution described in paragraph 0194 of WO 2015/093271 can be mentioned.
 現像方式としては、特に制限はなくパドル現像、シャワー現像、シャワー及びスピン現像、ディップ現像等のいずれでもよい。ここで、シャワー現像について説明すると、露光後のポジ型感光性樹脂層に現像液をシャワーにより吹き付けることにより、露光部分を除去することができる。また、現像の後に、洗浄剤などをシャワーにより吹き付け、ブラシなどで擦りながら、現像残渣を除去することが好ましい。現像液の液温度は20℃~40℃が好ましい。 The developing method is not particularly limited, and may be any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development and the like. Here, in the shower development, the exposed portion can be removed by spraying the developing solution onto the positive photosensitive resin layer after exposure by a shower. In addition, after development, it is preferable to remove a development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like. The temperature of the developing solution is preferably 20.degree. C. to 40.degree.
 更に、現像して得られたポジ型感光性樹脂層を含むパターンを加熱処理するポストベーク工程を有していてもよい。
 ポストベークの加熱は8.1kPa~121.6kPaの環境下で行うことが好ましく、506.6kPa以上の環境下で行うことがより好ましい。一方、1114.6kPa以下の環境下で行うことがより好ましく、101.3kPa以下の環境下で行うことが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの温度は、80℃~250℃であることが好ましく、110℃~170℃であることがより好ましく、130℃~150℃であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの時間は、1分~30分であることが好ましく、2分~10分であることがより好ましく、2分~4分であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークは、空気環境下で行っても、窒素置換環境下で行ってもよい。
Furthermore, you may have the post-baking process which heat-processes the pattern containing the positive type photosensitive resin layer obtained by developing.
Post-baking heating is preferably performed under an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably performed under an environment of 506.6 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is more preferable to carry out under an environment of 1114.6 kPa or less, and it is particularly preferable to carry out under an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
The post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
The post-baking time is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 minutes to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes.
Post-baking may be performed in an air environment or in a nitrogen-substituted environment.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、ポスト露光工程等のその他の工程を有していてもよい。 The method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure may have other steps such as a post-exposure step.
<エッチング工程(第1エッチング工程)>
 上記第1の実施態様においてはエッチング工程が、上記第2の実施態様においては第1エッチング工程が行われる。エッチング工程(第1エッチング工程)の一例を、図2(d)に概略的に示した。
 エッチング工程(第1エッチング工程)では、第1パターン14Aが配置されていない領域における複数の導電層のうち少なくとも第1導電層24及び第2導電層26をエッチング処理する。エッチングにより、同じパターンを有する第1導電層24A及び第2導電層26Aが形成される。
<Etching Process (First Etching Process)>
In the first embodiment, the etching step is performed, and in the second embodiment, the first etching step is performed. An example of the etching step (first etching step) is schematically shown in FIG.
In the etching step (first etching step), at least the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 among the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the first pattern 14A is not disposed are etched. By the etching, the first conductive layer 24A and the second conductive layer 26A having the same pattern are formed.
 導電層のエッチングは、特開2010-152155号公報の段落0048~段落0054等に記載の方法、公知のプラズマエッチング等のドライエッチングによる方法など、公知の方法でエッチングを適用することができる。 For the etching of the conductive layer, etching can be applied by a known method such as a method described in paragraph 0048 to paragraph 0054 of JP-A-2010-152155 or a method by dry etching such as known plasma etching.
 例えば、エッチングの方法としては、一般的に行われている、エッチング液に浸漬するウェットエッチング法が挙げられる。ウェットエッチングに用いられるエッチング液は、エッチングの対象に合わせて酸性タイプ又はアルカリ性タイプのエッチング液を適宜選択すればよい。
 酸性タイプのエッチング液としては、塩酸、硫酸、フッ酸、リン酸等の酸性成分単独の水溶液、酸性成分と塩化第2鉄、フッ化アンモニウム、過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。酸性成分は、複数の酸性成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
 アルカリ性タイプのエッチング液としては、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、アンモニア、有機アミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイドのような有機アミンの塩等のアルカリ成分単独の水溶液、アルカリ成分と過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。アルカリ成分は、複数のアルカリ成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
For example, as a method of etching, a commonly performed wet etching method in which the substrate is immersed in an etching solution can be mentioned. The etching solution used for wet etching may be appropriately selected from acid type or alkaline type etching solution in accordance with the object of etching.
Examples of the acid type etching solution include aqueous solutions of acidic components such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid and phosphoric acid alone, and mixed aqueous solutions of acidic components and salts of ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, potassium permanganate and the like. Be done. An acidic component may use the component which combined the several acidic component.
As an alkaline type etching solution, an aqueous solution of an alkali component alone such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amine, salt of organic amine such as tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide, alkali component and potassium permanganate etc. A mixed aqueous solution of salts and the like are exemplified. As the alkali component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
 エッチング液の温度は特に限定されないが、45℃以下であることが好ましい。本開示においてエッチングマスク(エッチングパターン)として使用される第1パターンは、45℃以下の温度域における酸性及びアルカリ性のエッチング液に対して特に優れた耐性を発揮することが好ましい。したがって、エッチング工程中にポジ型感光性樹脂層が剥離することが防止され、ポジ型感光性樹脂層の存在しない部分が選択的にエッチングされることになる。 The temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or less. The first pattern used as the etching mask (etching pattern) in the present disclosure preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to an acidic and alkaline etching solution in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or less. Therefore, peeling of the positive photosensitive resin layer during the etching process is prevented, and the portion where the positive photosensitive resin layer is not present is selectively etched.
 エッチング工程後、工程ラインの汚染を防ぐために、必要に応じて洗浄工程及び乾燥工程を行ってもよい。洗浄工程については、例えば常温で純水により10秒~300秒間基板を洗浄して行い、乾燥工程については、例えばエアブローを使用し、エアブロー圧(0.1kg/cm~5kg/cm程度)を適宜調整して乾燥を行えばよい。 After the etching process, a cleaning process and a drying process may be performed as needed in order to prevent contamination of the process line. The cleaning process is performed by, for example, cleaning the substrate with pure water at normal temperature for 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the drying process is performed using an air blow, for example, using an air blow pressure (about 0.1 kg / cm 2 to 5 kg / cm 2 ). Is adjusted appropriately and drying may be performed.
<第2露光工程>
 上記第2の実施態様においては第2露光工程が行われる。第2露光工程の一例を、図2(e)に概略的に示した。
 第1エッチング工程後、第1エッチング工程後の第1パターン14Aを第1パターンとは異なるパターンでパターン露光する。
<Second exposure step>
In the second embodiment, a second exposure step is performed. An example of the second exposure step is schematically shown in FIG.
After the first etching step, the first pattern 14A after the first etching step is subjected to pattern exposure with a pattern different from the first pattern.
 第2露光工程では、第1導電層上に残存する第1パターンに対し、後述する第2現像工程において少なくとも第1導電層の除去すべき部分に相当する箇所を露光する。
 第2露光工程におけるパターン露光は、第1露光工程で用いたマスク30とはパターンが異なるマスク40を用いること以外は第1露光工程におけるパターン露光と同じ方法を適用することができる。
In the second exposure step, a portion corresponding to a portion to be removed of at least the first conductive layer in the second developing step described later is exposed to the first pattern remaining on the first conductive layer.
The pattern exposure in the second exposure step can apply the same method as the pattern exposure in the first exposure step except that a mask 40 having a different pattern from that of the mask 30 used in the first exposure step is used.
<第2現像工程>
 上記第2の実施態様においては第2現像工程が行われる。第2現像工程の一例を、図2(f)に概略的に示した。
 第2現像工程では、第2露光工程後の第1パターン14Aを現像して第2パターン14Bを形成する。
 現像により、第1パターンのうち第2露光工程において露光された部分が除去される。
 なお、第2現像工程では、第1現像工程における現像と同じ方法を適用することができる。
<Second developing step>
In the second embodiment, the second development step is performed. An example of the second developing step is schematically shown in FIG.
In the second development step, the first pattern 14A after the second exposure step is developed to form a second pattern 14B.
By the development, a portion of the first pattern exposed in the second exposure step is removed.
In the second development step, the same method as the development in the first development step can be applied.
<第2エッチング工程>
 上記第2の実施態様においては第2露光工程が行われる。第2エッチング工程の一例を、図2(g)に概略的に示した。
 第2エッチング工程では、第2パターン14Bが配置されていない領域における複数の導電層のうち少なくとも第1導電層24Aをエッチング処理する。
<Second etching step>
In the second embodiment, a second exposure step is performed. An example of the second etching step is schematically shown in FIG.
In the second etching step, at least the first conductive layer 24A of the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the second pattern 14B is not disposed is etched.
 第2エッチング工程におけるエッチングは、エッチングにより除去すべき導電層に応じたエッチング液を選択すること以外は第1エッチング工程におけるエッチングと同じ方法を適用することができる。
 第2エッチング工程では、所望のパターンに応じて、第1エッチング工程よりも少ない導電層を選択的にエッチングすることが好ましい。例えば、図2に示すように、ポジ型感光性樹脂層が配置されていない領域において第1導電層24Bのみを選択的にエッチングするエッチング液を用いてエッチングを行うことで、第1導電層を第2導電層のパターンとは異なるパターンにすることができる。
 第2エッチング工程の終了後、少なくとも2種類のパターンの導電層24B,26Aを含む回路配線が形成される。
For the etching in the second etching step, the same method as the etching in the first etching step can be applied except that an etching solution corresponding to the conductive layer to be removed by etching is selected.
In the second etching step, depending on the desired pattern, it is preferable to selectively etch less conductive layers than in the first etching step. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the first conductive layer is etched by performing etching using an etching solution that selectively etches only the first conductive layer 24B in the region where the positive photosensitive resin layer is not disposed. The pattern of the second conductive layer can be different from that of the second conductive layer.
After the completion of the second etching process, a circuit wiring including the conductive layers 24B and 26A of at least two types of patterns is formed.
<ポジ型感光性樹脂層除去工程>
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層除去工程の一例を、図2(h)に概略的に示した。
 第2エッチング工程の終了後、第1導電層24B上の一部には第2パターン14Bが残存している。ポジ型感光性樹脂層が不要であれば、残存する全てのポジ型感光性樹脂層14Bを除去すればよい。
<Positive photosensitive resin layer removal process>
An example of the positive photosensitive resin layer removing step is schematically shown in FIG.
After the completion of the second etching process, the second pattern 14B remains on a part of the first conductive layer 24B. If the positive photosensitive resin layer is unnecessary, all the remaining positive photosensitive resin layer 14B may be removed.
 残存するポジ型感光性樹脂層を除去する方法としては特に制限はないが、薬品処理により除去する方法を挙げることができる。
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層の除去方法としては、例えば、好ましくは30℃~80℃、より好ましくは50℃~80℃にて撹拌中の剥離液にポジ型感光性樹脂層などを有する基材を1分~30分間浸漬する方法が挙げられる。
Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular as a method to remove the positive type photosensitive resin layer which remains, The method to remove by chemical processing can be mentioned.
As a method of removing the positive photosensitive resin layer, for example, a substrate having a positive photosensitive resin layer or the like is preferably added to the stripping solution under agitation at preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C. A method of immersion for 1 minute to 30 minutes may be mentioned.
 剥離液としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム等の無機アルカリ成分、又は、第1級アミン、第2級アミン、第3級アミン、第4級アンモニウム塩等の有機アルカリ成分を、水、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン又はこれらの混合溶液に溶解させた剥離液が挙げられる。剥離液を使用し、スプレー法、シャワー法、パドル法等により剥離してもよい。 As the peeling solution, for example, an inorganic alkali component such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide or an organic alkali component such as a primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine or a quaternary ammonium salt, And dimethylsulfoxide, N-methyl pyrrolidone or a mixture thereof. A peeling solution may be used to peel off by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method or the like.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、他の任意の工程を含んでもよい。例えば、以下のような工程が挙げられるが、これらの工程に限定されない。 The method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure may include other optional steps. For example, although the following processes are mentioned, it is not limited to these processes.
<保護フィルムを貼り付ける工程>
 上記第2の実施態様において、第1エッチング工程の後、第2露光工程の前に、第1パターン上に、光透過性を有する保護フィルム(不図示)を貼り付ける工程をさらに有してもよい。
 この場合、第2露光工程において、保護フィルムを介して第1パターンをパターン露光し、第2露光工程後、第1パターンから保護フィルムを剥離した後、第2現像工程を行うことが好ましい。
<Step of sticking protective film>
In the second embodiment, even after the first etching step and before the second exposure step, the method further includes the step of sticking a light transmitting protective film (not shown) on the first pattern. Good.
In this case, it is preferable that in the second exposure step, the first pattern is pattern-exposed through the protective film, and after the second exposure step, the second development step is performed after the protective film is peeled off from the first pattern.
<可視光線反射率を低下させる工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、基材上の複数の導電層の一部又は全ての可視光線反射率を低下させる処理をする工程を含むことが可能である。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理としては、酸化処理などを挙げることができる。例えば、銅を酸化処理して酸化銅とし、黒化することにより、可視光線反射率を低下させることができる。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理の好ましい態様については、特開2014-150118号公報の段落0017~段落0025、並びに、特開2013-206315号公報の段落0041、段落0042、段落0048及び段落0058に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Step of reducing visible light reflectance>
The method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure can include the step of reducing the visible light reflectance of part or all of the plurality of conductive layers on the substrate.
An oxidation process etc. can be mentioned as a process which reduces the visible light reflectance. For example, the visible light reflectance can be reduced by oxidizing copper to copper oxide and blackening the copper.
About the preferable aspect of the process to which the visible light reflectance is reduced, Paragraph 0017-Paragraph 0025 of Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2014-150118, and Paragraph 0041, Paragraph 0042, Paragraph 0048 and Paragraph 0058 of Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-206315. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein by reference.
<絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、形成した回路配線上に絶縁膜を形成する工程と、絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程を含むことも好ましい。
 このような構成により、上述の第二の電極パターンを、第一の電極パターンと絶縁しつつ、形成することができる。
 絶縁膜を形成する工程については、特に制限はなく、公知の永久膜を形成する方法を挙げることができる。また、絶縁性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの絶縁膜を形成してもよい。
 絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程については、特に制限はない。導電性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの新たな導電層を形成してもよい。
<Step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film>
The method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure preferably includes the steps of forming an insulating film on the formed circuit wiring and forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film.
With such a configuration, the second electrode pattern described above can be formed while being insulated from the first electrode pattern.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular about the process of forming an insulating film, The method of forming a well-known permanent film can be mentioned. Alternatively, an insulating film with a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having an insulating property.
There is no particular limitation on the step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film. A photosensitive material having conductivity may be used to form a new conductive layer of a desired pattern by photolithography.
 また、図2を参照した説明では、2層の導電層を備えた回路配線形成用基板に対して2つの異なるパターンを有する回路配線を形成する場合について説明したが、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法を適用する基板の導電層の数は2層に限定されず、導電層が3層以上積層された回路配線形成用基板を用い、前述した露光工程、現像工程、及びエッチング工程の組み合わせを3回以上行うことで、3層以上の導電層をそれぞれ異なる回路配線パターンに形成することもできる。 Further, in the description with reference to FIG. 2, the case of forming the circuit wiring having two different patterns on the circuit wiring formation substrate provided with the two conductive layers has been described. The number of conductive layers of the substrate to which the manufacturing method is applied is not limited to two, and a combination of the exposure step, the development step, and the etching step described above is used using the circuit wiring formation substrate in which three or more conductive layers are stacked. By carrying out three or more times, three or more conductive layers can be formed in different circuit wiring patterns.
 また、図2には示していないが、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、基材が両方の表面にそれぞれ複数の導電層を有し、基材の両方の表面に形成された導電層に対して逐次又は同時に回路形成することも好ましい。このような構成により、基材の一方の表面に第一の導電パターン、もう一方の表面に第二の導電パターンを形成したタッチパネル用回路配線を形成することができる。また、このような構成のタッチパネル用回路配線を、ロールツーロールで基材の両面から形成することも好ましい。 Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, in the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, the base material has a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces respectively, and the conductive layer formed on both surfaces of the base It is also preferable to form a circuit sequentially or simultaneously. With such a configuration, it is possible to form a touch panel circuit wiring in which the first conductive pattern is formed on one surface of the base and the second conductive pattern is formed on the other surface. Moreover, it is also preferable to form the circuit wiring for touchscreens of such a structure from both surfaces of a base material by roll-to-roll.
(回路配線及び回路基板)
 本開示に係る回路配線は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線である。
 本開示に係る回路基板は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を有する基板である。
 本開示に係る回路基板の用途は限定されないが、例えば、タッチパネル用回路基板であることが好ましい。
(Circuit wiring and circuit board)
The circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
A circuit board according to the present disclosure is a substrate having a circuit interconnect manufactured by the method of manufacturing a circuit interconnect according to the present disclosure.
Although the use of the circuit board which concerns on this indication is not limited, For example, it is preferable that it is a circuit board for touch panels.
(入力装置及び表示装置)
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線を備えた装置として、入力装置が挙げられる。
 本開示における入力装置は、静電容量型タッチパネルであることが好ましい。
 本開示における表示装置は、本開示における入力装置を備えることが好ましい。
 また、本開示における表示装置は、有機EL表示装置、及び、液晶表示装置等の画像表示装置であることが好ましい。
(Input device and display device)
As an apparatus provided with the circuit wiring manufactured by the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication, an input device is mentioned.
The input device in the present disclosure is preferably a capacitive touch panel.
The display device in the present disclosure preferably includes the input device in the present disclosure.
Further, the display device in the present disclosure is preferably an image display device such as an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
(タッチパネル、及び、タッチパネル表示装置並びにこれらの製造方法)
 本開示に係るタッチパネルは、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネルである。また、本開示に係るタッチパネルは、透明基板と、電極と、絶縁層又は保護層とを少なくとも有することが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネル表示装置であり、本開示に係るタッチパネルを有するタッチパネル表示装置であることが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル又はタッチパネル表示装置の製造方法は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法を含むことが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル又はタッチパネル表示装置の製造方法は、感光性転写材料の製造方法により得られた感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層を上記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、上記露光する工程後の感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。各工程の詳細は、上述の回路配線の製造方法における各工程の詳細と同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル及び本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置のおける検出方法としては、抵抗膜方式、静電容量方式、超音波方式、電磁誘導方式、及び、光学方式など公知の方式いずれでもよい。中でも、静電容量方式が好ましい。
 タッチパネル型としては、いわゆる、インセル型(例えば、特表2012-517051号公報の図5、図6、図7、図8に記載のもの)、いわゆる、オンセル型(例えば、特開2013-168125号公報の図19に記載のもの、特開2012-89102号公報の図1や図5に記載のもの)、OGS(One Glass Solution)型、TOL(Touch-on-Lens)型(例えば、特開2013-54727号公報の図2に記載のもの)、その他の構成(例えば、特開2013-164871号公報の図6に記載のもの)、各種アウトセル型(いわゆる、GG、G1・G2、GFF、GF2、GF1、G1Fなど)を挙げることができる。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル及び本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置としては、『最新タッチパネル技術』(2009年7月6日、(株)テクノタイムズ社発行)、三谷雄二監修、“タッチパネルの技術と開発”、シーエムシー出版(2004,12)、FPD International 2009 Forum T-11講演テキストブック、Cypress
 Semiconductor Corporation アプリケーションノートAN2292等に開示されている構成を適用することができる。
(Touch panel, and touch panel display device and manufacturing method thereof)
The touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel having at least the circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure. In addition, the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
The touch panel display device according to the present disclosure is a touch panel display device having at least a circuit wiring manufactured by the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel display device having a touch panel according to the present disclosure.
It is preferable that the manufacturing method of the touch panel or touch-panel display apparatus which concerns on this indication includes the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication.
In the method of manufacturing a touch panel or a touch panel display device according to the present disclosure, the step of bonding the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material obtained by the method of manufacturing a photosensitive transfer material in contact with the substrate A step of pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the step, a step of developing the photosensitive resin layer after the step of exposing to form a pattern, and a region where the pattern is not disposed And the step of etching the substrate in the following order: The details of each step are the same as the details of each step in the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
As a detection method in the touch panel according to the present disclosure and the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure, any known methods such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method may be used. Among them, the capacitance method is preferable.
As a touch panel type, a so-called in-cell type (for example, those shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 7 and 8 of JP-A-2012-517051), a so-called on-cell type (for example, JP-A 2013-168125) 19 described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-89102, and those described in FIG. 1 and FIG. 5 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-89102, OGS (One Glass Solution) type, TOL (Touch-on-Lens) type (e.g. 2 of 2013-54727, other configurations (for example, the one described in FIG. 6 of JP-A-2013-164871), various out-cell types (so-called GG, G1 · G2, GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F etc. can be mentioned.
As the touch panel according to the present disclosure and the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure, “latest touch panel technology” (issued on July 6, 2009, Techno Times Inc.), supervised by Yuji Mitani, “touch panel technology and development”, CMC Publishing (2004, 12), FPD International 2009 Forum T-11 lecture textbook, Cypress
The configuration disclosed in Semiconductor Corporation Application Note AN2292 and the like can be applied.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明の実施形態を更に具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び、処理手順等は、本発明の実施形態の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。したがって、本発明の実施形態の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」、「%」は質量基準である。なお、本実施例における「極大吸収波長」とは、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長である。 Hereinafter, the embodiments of the present invention will be more specifically described by way of examples. The materials, amounts used, proportions, treatment contents, treatment procedures and the like shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the embodiment of the present invention. Accordingly, the scope of the embodiments of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. In addition, unless there is particular notice, "part" and "%" are mass references. The “maximum absorption wavelength” in the present example is the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development.
<pKa及びpKaHの計算方法>
 Advanced Chemistry Development社製ACD/Labs software Ver 8.0 for Microsoft windowsのACD/pka DB ver 8.07を使用して、化合物のpKa、及び、化合物の共役酸のpKa(pKaH)を計算した。
<Method of calculating pKa and pKaH>
The pKa of the compound and the pKa (pKaH) of the conjugate acid of the compound were calculated using ACD / Labs software Ver 8.0 for Microsoft windows manufactured by Advanced Chemistry Development, ACD / pka DB ver 8.07.
〔重合体〕
 以下の例において、以下の略語はそれぞれ以下の化合物を表す。
 ATHF:2-テトラヒドロフラニルアクリレート(合成品)
 MATHF:2-テトラヒドロフラニルメタクリレート(合成品)
 ATHP:テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イルアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製)
 MATHP:テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イルメタクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製)
 MAEVE:1-エトキシエチルメタクリレート(和光純薬工業(株)製)
 TBMA:t-ブチルメタクリレート(和光純薬工業(株)製)
 AA:アクリル酸(東京化成工業(株)製)
 MAA:メタクリル酸(東京化成工業(株)製)
 EA:アクリル酸エチル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 MMA:メタクリル酸メチル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 CHA:アクリル酸シクロヘキシル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 CHMA:メタクリル酸シクロヘキシル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 EHMA:アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 BMA:アクリル酸n-ブチル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 PGMEA(プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート):(昭和電工(株)製)
 V-601:ジメチル 2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオネート)(和光純薬工業(株)製)
[Polymer]
In the following examples, the following abbreviations respectively represent the following compounds:
ATHF: 2-tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (synthetic product)
MATHF: 2-tetrahydrofuranyl methacrylate (synthetic product)
ATHP: tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl acrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)
MATHP: tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl methacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)
MAEVE: 1-ethoxyethyl methacrylate (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
TBMA: t-butyl methacrylate (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
AA: acrylic acid (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
MAA: methacrylic acid (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
EA: Ethyl acrylate (made by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
MMA: methyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
CHA: cyclohexyl acrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
CHMA: cyclohexyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
EHMA: 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
BMA: n-butyl acrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
PGMEA (propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate): (manufactured by Showa Denko KK)
V-601: Dimethyl 2,2'-azobis (2-methyl propionate) (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
<ATHFの合成>
 3つ口フラスコにアクリル酸(72.1部、1.0モル当量)、ヘキサン(72.1部)を加え20℃に冷却した。カンファースルホン酸(0.00070質量部、0.003ミリモル当量)、2-ジヒドロフラン(70.1質量部、1.0モル当量))を滴下した後に、20℃±2℃で1.5時間撹拌した後、35℃まで昇温して2時間撹拌した。ヌッチェにキョーワード200(水酸化アルミニウム吸着剤、協和化学工業(株)製)、キョーワード1000(ハイドロタルサイト系吸着剤、協和化学工業(株)製)の順に敷き詰めた後、反応液をろ過することでろ過液を得た。得られたろ過液にヒドロキノンモノメチルエーテル(MEHQ、0.0012部)を加えた後、40℃で減圧濃縮することで、アクリル酸テトラヒドロフラン-2-イル(ATHF)140.8部を無色油状物として得た(収率99.0%)。
<Synthesis of ATHF>
Acrylic acid (72.1 parts, 1.0 molar equivalent) and hexane (72.1 parts) were added to a three-necked flask and cooled to 20 ° C. After dropwise addition of camphorsulfonic acid (0.00070 parts by mass, 0.003 mmol equivalent), 2-dihydrofuran (70.1 parts by mass, 1.0 molar equivalent)), 1.5 hours at 20 ° C. ± 2 ° C. After stirring, the temperature was raised to 35 ° C. and stirred for 2 hours. The reaction liquid is filtered after laying in order of KNU ward 200 (aluminum hydroxide adsorbent, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and KYOWARD 1000 (hydrotalcite-based adsorbent, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) in Nutsche. The filtrate was obtained by doing. After adding hydroquinone monomethyl ether (MEHQ, 0.0012 parts) to the obtained filtrate, the solution is concentrated under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. to obtain 140.8 parts of tetrahydrofuran-2-yl acrylate as a colorless oil. Obtained (yield 99.0%).
<MATHFの合成>
 3つ口フラスコにメタクリル酸(86.1部、1.0モル当量)、ヘキサン(86.1部)を加え20℃に冷却した。カンファースルホン酸(0.00070質量部、0.003ミリモル当量)、2-ジヒドロフラン(70.1質量部、1.0モル当量))を滴下した後に、20℃±2℃で1.5時間撹拌した後、35℃まで昇温して2時間撹拌した。ヌッチェにキョーワード200、キョーワード1000の順に敷き詰めた後、反応液をろ過することでろ過液を得た。得られたろ過液にMEHQ(0.0012部)を加えた後、40℃で減圧濃縮することで、メタクリル酸テトラヒドロフラン-2-イル(MATHF)156.2部を無色油状物として得た(収率98.0%)。
<Synthesis of MATHF>
In a three-necked flask, methacrylic acid (86.1 parts, 1.0 molar equivalent) and hexane (86.1 parts) were added and cooled to 20 ° C. After dropwise addition of camphorsulfonic acid (0.00070 parts by mass, 0.003 mmol equivalent), 2-dihydrofuran (70.1 parts by mass, 1.0 molar equivalent)), 1.5 hours at 20 ° C. ± 2 ° C. After stirring, the temperature was raised to 35 ° C. and stirred for 2 hours. After laying in the order of Kyo Ward 200 and Kyo Ward 1000 in Nutsche, the filtrate was obtained by filtering the reaction liquid. MEHQ (0.0012 parts) was added to the obtained filtrate, and the solution was concentrated under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. to obtain 156.2 parts of tetrahydrofuran-2-yl methacrylate (MATHF) as a colorless oil (collection 98.0%).
<重合体A1の合成例>
 3つ口フラスコに酢酸n-プロピル(150.0質量部)を入れ、窒素雰囲気下において90℃に昇温した。ATHF(25.0質量部)、AA(3.7質量部)、EA(15.0質量部)、MMA(32.4質量部)、CHMA(23.9質量部)、V-601(3.1質量部)を混合した溶液を、90℃±2℃の温度範囲に維持した3つ口フラスコ溶液中に2時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後,90℃±2℃の温度範囲内にて2時間撹拌することで、重合体A1(固形分濃度40.0質量%)を得た。
Synthesis Example of Polymer A1
In a three-necked flask, n-propyl acetate (150.0 parts by mass) was placed, and the temperature was raised to 90 ° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere. ATHF (25.0 parts by mass), AA (3.7 parts by mass), EA (15.0 parts by mass), MMA (32.4 parts by mass), CHMA (23.9 parts by mass), V-601 (3 A solution obtained by mixing 1 part by mass) was dropped into a three-necked flask maintained at a temperature range of 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C. over 2 hours. After completion of the dropwise addition, by stirring for 2 hours within a temperature range of 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C., a polymer A1 (solid content concentration 40.0 mass%) was obtained.
<重合体A-2~A-9の合成例>
 モノマーの種類等を下記表1に示す通りに変更し、その他の条件については、重合体A-1と同様の方法で合成した。重合体の固形分濃度は40質量%とした。
Synthesis Example of Polymers A-2 to A-9
The types of monomers and the like were changed as shown in Table 1 below, and other conditions were synthesized in the same manner as in the polymer A-1. The solid content concentration of the polymer was 40% by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000023
<重合体A-10の合成例>
 特開2008-64908号公報に記載の酸分解性高分子化合物PS-2と同じ方法で合成したポリマーを、重合体A-10(カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有しない重合体)とした。
Synthesis Example of Polymer A-10
A polymer synthesized by the same method as the acid-degradable polymer compound PS-2 described in JP-A-2008-64908 has a polymer A-10 (having a group in which the carboxylic acid group is protected by the acid-degradable group) It was set as the polymer which does not contain a unit.
〔光酸発生剤〕
 B-1:下記に示す構造の化合物(特開2013-47765号公報の段落0227に記載の方法に従って合成した。)
[Photo acid generator]
B-1: Compound of the structure shown below (synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0227 of JP-A-2013-47765)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 B-2:BASF社製Irgacure PAG-103、下記化合物 B-2: BASF Irgacure PAG-103, the following compounds
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 B-3:下記に示す構造の化合物(特開2014-197155号公報の段落0210に記載の方法に従って合成した。) B-3: Compound having the following structure (synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0210 of JP-A-2014-197155).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 B-4:WPAG-281(商品名、和光純薬工業(株)製) B-4: WPAG-281 (trade name, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 B-5:下記に示す構造の化合物(特開2015-151347号公報の段落0138に記載の方法に従って合成した。) B-5: Compound having the following structure (synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0138 of JP-A-2015-151347)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
〔潜在性色素〕
 C-1:上述したC-1と同じ化合物、福井山田化学工業(株)製、極大吸収波長:576nm、pKaH:-3.53
 C-2:上述したC-2と同じ化合物、Chameleon社製、極大吸収波長:533nm、pKaH:共役酸を形成せず
 C-3:上述したC-3と同じ化合物、山本化成(株)製、極大吸収波長:531nm、pKaH:共役酸を形成せず
 C-4:上述したC-4と同じ化合物、福井山田化学工業(株)製、極大吸収波長:460nm及び595nm、pKaH:0.53
 C-5:上述したC-5と同じ化合物、福井山田化学工業(株)製、極大吸収波長:470nm及び672nm、pKaH:0.23
 C-6:上述したC-6と同じ化合物、福井山田化学工業(株)製、極大吸収波長:525nm、pKaH:0.27
 C’-1:下記化合物、福井山田化学工業(株)製、極大吸収波長:598nm、pKaH:4.73
 C’-2:下記化合物、保土谷化学工業(株)製、極大吸収波長:444nm、pKaH:1.86
[Latent dye]
C-1: The same compound as C-1 described above, manufactured by Fukui Yamada Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., maximum absorption wavelength: 576 nm, pKaH: -3.53
C-2: The same compound as C-2 described above, manufactured by Chameleon, maximum absorption wavelength: 533 nm, pKaH: no conjugated acid is formed C-3: the same compound as C-3 described above, manufactured by Yamamoto Kasei Co., Ltd. Maximum absorption wavelength: 531 nm, pKaH: not forming conjugated acid C-4: the same compound as C-4 described above, manufactured by Fukui Yamada Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., maximum absorption wavelength: 460 nm and 595 nm, pKaH: 0.53
C-5: The same compound as C-5 described above, manufactured by Fukui Yamada Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., maximum absorption wavelengths: 470 nm and 672 nm, pKaH: 0.23
C-6: The same compound as C-6 described above, manufactured by Fukui Yamada Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., maximum absorption wavelength: 525 nm, pKaH: 0.27
C'-1: The following compound, Fukui Yamada Chemical Industries, Ltd. make, maximum absorption wavelength: 598 nm, pKaH: 4.73
C'-2: The following compound, Hodogaya Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. product, maximum absorption wavelength: 444 nm, pKaH: 1.86
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
〔塩基性化合物〕
 D-1:下記に示す構造の化合物(CMTU)
[Basic compound]
D-1: Compound of the structure shown below (CMTU)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 D-2:2,4,5-トリフェニルイミダゾール(東京化成工業(株)製)
 D-3:1,5-ジアザビシクロ[4.3.0]-5-ノネン(東京化成工業(株)製)
D-2: 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
D-3: 1,5-Diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
〔界面活性剤〕
 E-1:メガファックF-554(フッ素系ノニオン界面活性剤、DIC(株)製)
 E-2:メガファックF-552(フッ素系ノニオン界面活性剤、DIC(株)製)
 E-3:メガファックF-253(フッ素系ノニオン界面活性剤、DIC(株)製)
[Surfactant]
E-1: Megafac F-554 (fluorinated nonionic surfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation)
E-2: Megafac F-552 (fluorinated nonionic surfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation)
E-3: Megafac F-253 (fluorinated nonionic surfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation)
(実施例1~22及び比較例1~4)
<感光性転写材料の調製>
 実施例1~22及び比較例1~4では、下記表2に示す固形分比となるように、重合体成分、光酸発生剤、塩基性化合物、界面活性剤、及び、その他の成分を酢酸n-プロピル/メチルエチルケトン=70/30(体積%)に固形分濃度14質量%になるように溶解混合し、孔径0.2μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過して、感光性樹脂組成物を得た。
 この感光性樹脂組成物を、仮支持体となる厚さ16μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(以下、「PET(A)」ともいう。)の上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなるように塗布した。その後、100℃のコンベクションオーブンで2分間乾燥させ、最後にカバーフィルムとしてポリプロピレンフィルム(王子エフテックス(株)製、アルファンPK-002)を圧着して感光性転写材料を作成した。
(Examples 1 to 22 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4)
Preparation of Photosensitive Transfer Material
In Examples 1 to 22 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4, the polymer component, the photoacid generator, the basic compound, the surfactant, and the other components were made to have acetic acid so as to obtain the solid content ratio shown in Table 2 below. Dissolve and mix n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone = 70/30 (volume%) to a solid content concentration of 14% by mass, filter with a polytetrafluoroethylene filter with a pore size of 0.2 μm, obtain a photosensitive resin composition Obtained.
This photosensitive resin composition was dried on a 16 μm thick polyethylene terephthalate film (hereinafter, also referred to as “PET (A)”) to be a temporary support by using a slit nozzle and having a dry film thickness of 3.0 μm. It applied so that it might become. Then, it was dried in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes, and finally a polypropylene film (Alfane PK-002, manufactured by Oji F-TEX Co., Ltd.) was press-bonded as a cover film to prepare a photosensitive transfer material.
[性能評価]
 厚さ100μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム上に厚さ200nmでスパッタ法にて銅層を作製した銅層付きPET基板を使用した。
[Performance evaluation]
A copper layer-coated PET substrate was used in which a copper layer was produced by sputtering at a thickness of 200 nm on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 100 μm.
<感度評価>
 作製した感光性転写材料を、線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min.のラミネート条件で銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。なお、ロール温度90℃で、目視評価により、感光性樹脂層が銅層に泡や浮きがなく密着している面積を確認し、上記面積が95%未満である場合、上記面積が95%以上になるまでロール温度を上げて試料を作製した。
 仮支持体を剥離せずに線幅3μm~20μmのラインアンドスペースパターンマスク(Duty比 1:1)を介して超高圧水銀灯で感光性樹脂層を露光後、1時間放置した後に仮支持体を剥離して現像した。現像は28℃の1.0%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用い、シャワー現像で30秒行った。上記方法にて10μmのラインアンドスペースパターンを形成したとき、スペース部の残渣を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)により観察し評価し、SEMによる観察において、残渣が確認できなくなる露光量を求めた。露光量が200mJ/cm以下が実用可能レベルである。露光量が小さいほど、露光感度に優れているといえる。
-評価基準-
 A:80mJ/cm以下
 B:80mJ/cmを超え100mJ/cm以下
 C:100mJ/cmを超え200mJ/cm以下
 D:200mJ/cmを超え300mJ/cm以下
 E:300mJ/cmを超える
<Sensitivity evaluation>
The prepared photosensitive transfer material was subjected to a linear pressure of 0.8 MPa, a linear velocity of 3.0 m / min. The laminate was laminated on a PET substrate with a copper layer under the following lamination conditions. The area where the photosensitive resin layer is in close contact with the copper layer without bubbles or floats is confirmed by visual evaluation at a roll temperature of 90 ° C., and when the above area is less than 95%, the above area is 95% or more The roll temperature was raised until it became and the sample was produced.
After exposing the photosensitive resin layer with an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp through a line-and-space pattern mask (Duty ratio 1: 1) with a line width of 3 μm to 20 μm without peeling off the temporary support, the temporary support is allowed to stand for 1 hour. It peeled and developed. The development was carried out for 30 seconds by shower development using a 1.0% aqueous sodium carbonate solution at 28 ° C. When a 10 μm line-and-space pattern was formed by the above method, the residue in the space was observed and evaluated by a scanning electron microscope (SEM), and the exposure amount at which the residue could not be confirmed was determined in the observation by SEM. An exposure dose of 200 mJ / cm 2 or less is a practical level. The smaller the exposure amount, the better the exposure sensitivity.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: 80mJ / cm 2 or less B: 80mJ / cm 2 beyond 100 mJ / cm 2 or less C: exceed 100mJ / cm 2 200mJ / cm 2 or less D: exceed 200mJ / cm 2 300mJ / cm 2 or less E: 300 mJ / more than cm 2
<視認性評価>
 作製した感光性転写材料を、線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min.のラミネート条件で銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。なお、ロール温度90℃で、目視評価により、感光性樹脂層が銅層に泡や浮きがなく密着している面積を確認し、上記面積が95%未満である場合、上記面積が95%以上になるまでロール温度を上げて試料を作製した。仮支持体を剥離せずに一部を遮光し、超高圧水銀灯で感光性樹脂層を露光した後、4時間放置した。露光量は、上記感度評価で求めた露光量を採用した。
 白黒用CCD(Charge Coupled Device)カメラの先端に倍率4倍の光学レンズを取り付け、露光部の反射光強度と未露光部の反射光強度とをそれぞれ測定した。
 反射光強度比=(露光部の反射光強度)/(未露光部の反射光強度)
 上記反射光強度比の値が小さいほど良好な性能であり、下記評価基準において実用レベルはA~Cである。
<Visibility evaluation>
The prepared photosensitive transfer material was subjected to a linear pressure of 0.8 MPa, a linear velocity of 3.0 m / min. The laminate was laminated on a PET substrate with a copper layer under the following lamination conditions. The area where the photosensitive resin layer is in close contact with the copper layer without bubbles or floats is confirmed by visual evaluation at a roll temperature of 90 ° C., and when the above area is less than 95%, the above area is 95% or more The roll temperature was raised until it became and the sample was produced. A part of the temporary support was light-shielded without peeling, and after exposing the photosensitive resin layer with an extra-high pressure mercury lamp, it was left for 4 hours. The amount of exposure used was the amount of exposure obtained by the above sensitivity evaluation.
An optical lens with a magnification of 4 was attached to the tip of a black and white CCD (Charge Coupled Device) camera, and the reflected light intensity of the exposed area and the reflected light intensity of the unexposed area were measured.
Reflected light intensity ratio = (reflected light intensity of exposed area) / (reflected light intensity of unexposed area)
The smaller the value of the reflected light intensity ratio, the better the performance, and the practical level is A to C in the following evaluation criteria.
-測定条件-
 読取りカメラ画素数:500万画素(2,432×2,050)
 読取りカメラ分光感度:400nm=x0.6、500nm=x1.0、600nm=x0.84、700nm=x0.55
 光源:D65光源(国際照明委員会(CIE)標準光源D65)を、富士フイルム(株)製シャープカットフィルタSC-42を通過させたもの
-Measurement condition-
Reading camera pixel count: 5 million pixels (2,432 × 2, 050)
Reading camera spectral sensitivity: 400 nm = x 0.6, 500 nm = x 1.0, 600 nm = x 0.84, 700 nm = x 0.55
Light source: D65 light source (International Lighting Commission (CIE) standard light source D65) passed through Fujifilm Corporation Sharp Cut Filter SC-42
-評価基準-
 A:反射光強度比が0.45未満
 B:反射光強度比が0.45以上0.65未満
 C:反射光強度比が0.65以上0.78未満
 D:反射光強度比が0.78以上0.90未満
 E:反射光強度比が0.90以上
-Evaluation criteria-
A: Reflected light intensity ratio is less than 0.45 B: Reflected light intensity ratio is 0.45 or more and less than 0.65 C: Reflected light intensity ratio is 0.65 or more and less than 0.78 D: Reflected light intensity ratio is 0. 78 or more and less than 0.90 E: reflected light intensity ratio is 0.90 or more
<直線性評価>
 作製した感光性転写材料を、線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min.のラミネート条件で銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。なお、ロール温度90℃で、目視評価により、感光性樹脂層が銅層に泡や浮きがなく密着している面積を確認し、上記面積が95%未満である場合、上記面積が95%以上になるまでロール温度を上げて試料を作製した。
 仮支持体を剥離せずに線幅3μm~20μmのラインアンドスペースパターン(Duty比 1:1)マスクを介して超高圧水銀灯で、感光性樹脂層を感度評価で求めた露光量で露光した。4時間放置した後に仮支持体を剥離して現像した。現像は28℃の1.0%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用い、シャワー現像で30秒行った。このようにして得られたラインアンドスペースパターンで、ライン幅が7±0.5μmに入るパターンの長手方向のエッジ40μmの範囲について、線幅を50ポイント測定し、その測定ばらつきについて標準偏差を求め、3σを算出した。これをn=5測定し平均値(LWR、line width roughness)を求めた。値が小さいほど良好な性能であり、実用レベルはA~Cである。
-評価基準-
 A:LWRが200nm未満
 B:LWRが200nm以上240nm未満
 C:LWRが240nm以上290nm未満
 D:LWRが290nm以上340nm未満
 E:LWRが340nm以上
<Linearity evaluation>
The prepared photosensitive transfer material was subjected to a linear pressure of 0.8 MPa, a linear velocity of 3.0 m / min. The laminate was laminated on a PET substrate with a copper layer under the following lamination conditions. The area where the photosensitive resin layer is in close contact with the copper layer without bubbles or floats is confirmed by visual evaluation at a roll temperature of 90 ° C., and when the above area is less than 95%, the above area is 95% or more The roll temperature was raised until it became and the sample was produced.
Without peeling off the temporary support, the photosensitive resin layer was exposed with an exposure amount obtained by sensitivity evaluation with an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp through a line and space pattern (Duty ratio 1: 1) mask with a line width of 3 μm to 20 μm. After standing for 4 hours, the temporary support was peeled off and developed. The development was carried out for 30 seconds by shower development using a 1.0% aqueous sodium carbonate solution at 28 ° C. With the line and space pattern thus obtained, 50 points of the line width are measured for the range of 40 μm of the longitudinal edge of the pattern in which the line width falls within 7 ± 0.5 μm, and the standard deviation of the measurement variation is determined , 3σ was calculated. This was measured at n = 5 and the average value (LWR, line width roughness) was determined. The smaller the value, the better the performance, and the practical level is AC.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: LWR less than 200 nm B: LWR less than 200 nm and less than 240 nm C: LWR less than 240 nm and less than 290 nm D: LWR less than 290 nm and less than 340 nm E: LWR less than 340 nm
 評価結果を、表2にまとめて示す。 The evaluation results are summarized in Table 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
 なお、表2の各成分の量の単位は、質量部である。
 また、比較例4では、感度が出ないため、きれいなパターンが形成できず直線性は「E」となった。
 表2に示すように、本開示に係る感光性樹脂組成物は、感度及び視認性を高いレベルで両立することが可能であった。
 また、表2に示すように、本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、銅層への転写が可能であった。
In addition, the unit of the quantity of each component of Table 2 is a mass part.
Further, in Comparative Example 4, since no sensitivity was obtained, a clean pattern could not be formed and the linearity was "E".
As shown in Table 2, the photosensitive resin composition according to the present disclosure was able to achieve both sensitivity and visibility at a high level.
Also, as shown in Table 2, the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure was capable of transfer to a copper layer.
(実施例101)
 100μm厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電性層として酸化インジウムスズ(ITO)をスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電性層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、回路形成基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で得た感光性転写材料1をラミネートした(線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min、ロール温度90℃)。仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電性層パッドが連結された構成を持つ図3に示すパターン(以下、「パターンA」とも称する。)を設けたフォトマスクを用いてコンタクトパターン露光した。
 なお、図3に示すパターンAは、実線部SL及びグレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅(実線部SL)とITO(グレー部G)とが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
(Example 101)
Indium tin oxide (ITO) is deposited by sputtering as a conductive layer of the second layer on a 100 μm-thick PET substrate by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper is vacuum deposited thereon as a conductive layer of the first layer. A film was formed at a thickness of 200 nm to form a circuit formation substrate.
The photosensitive transfer material 1 obtained in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.). The contact pattern was exposed using a photomask provided with a pattern (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern A”) shown in FIG. 3 having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. .
In the pattern A shown in FIG. 3, the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually illustrates the alignment alignment frame.
Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A. Next, the copper layer is etched using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and then the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching liquid (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.) The board | substrate with which copper (solid line part SL) and ITO (gray part G) were both drawn by the pattern A was obtained.
 次いで、アライメントを合わせた状態で図4に示すパターン(以下、「パターンB」とも称する。)の開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、現像、水洗を行った。
 なお、図4に示すパターンBは、グレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後、Cu-02を用いて銅層をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(10質量%水酸化ナトリウム水溶液)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 これにより、回路配線基板を得た。顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれや欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
Next, pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with an opening of a pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as “pattern B”) shown in FIG. 4 in a state where alignment is aligned, and development and washing were performed.
In the pattern B shown in FIG. 4, the gray portion G is a light shielding portion, and the dotted line portion DL virtually illustrates the alignment alignment frame.
Thereafter, the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled using a peeling solution (10 mass% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
Thus, a circuit wiring board was obtained. When observed with a microscope, there was no peeling or chipping, and it was a beautiful pattern.
(実施例102)
 100μm厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電性層としてITOをスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電性層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、回路形成基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で得た感光性転写材料1をラミネートした(線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min、ロール温度90℃)。
 仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電性層パッドが連結された構成を持つ図3に示すパターンAを設けたフォトマスクを用いて感光性樹脂層をパターン露光した。その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅(実線部SL)とITO(グレー部G)とが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
 次いで、残存しているレジスト上に保護層としてPET(A)をラミネートした。この状態で、アライメントを合わせた状態で図4に示すパターンBの開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、PET(A)を剥離した後に現像、水洗を行った。
 その後、Cu-02を用いて銅配線をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれや欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
(Example 102)
ITO is deposited as a conductive layer of the second layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm on a 100 μm-thick PET substrate, and copper is deposited thereon by a vacuum evaporation method to a thickness of 200 nm as a conductive layer of the first layer. The film was formed as a circuit formation substrate.
The photosensitive transfer material 1 obtained in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.).
The photosensitive resin layer was pattern-exposed using a photomask provided with a pattern A shown in FIG. 3 having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A. Next, the copper layer is etched using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and then the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching liquid (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.) The board | substrate with which copper (solid line part SL) and ITO (gray part G) were both drawn by the pattern A was obtained.
Then, PET (A) was laminated as a protective layer on the remaining resist. In this state, pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with the opening of pattern B shown in FIG. 4 in a state of alignment, and after PET (A) was peeled off, development and water washing were performed.
Thereafter, the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled using a peeling solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
When observed with a microscope, there was no peeling or chipping, and it was a beautiful pattern.
12 仮支持体
14 感光性樹脂層
14A 第1パターン
14B 第2パターン
16 カバーフィルム
20 回路形成用基板
22 基材
24 第1導電層
24A 第1導電層(第1エッチング工程後)
24B 第1導電層(第2エッチング工程後)
26 第2導電層
26A 第2導電層(第1エッチング工程及び第2エッチング工程後)
30 マスク
40 マスク
100 感光性転写材料
SL 実線部
G グレー部
DL 点線部
12 temporary support 14 photosensitive resin layer 14A first pattern 14B second pattern 16 cover film 20 substrate for circuit formation 22 base material 24 first conductive layer 24A first conductive layer (after first etching process)
24B first conductive layer (after second etching step)
26 second conductive layer 26A second conductive layer (after the first etching step and the second etching step)
30 mask 40 mask 100 photosensitive transfer material SL solid line portion G gray portion DL dotted portion

Claims (15)

  1.  カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体、
     光酸発生剤、及び、
     共役酸のpKaが4.5未満又は共役酸を形成しない化合物であり、かつ発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が500nm以上である潜在性色素、を含有する
     感光性樹脂組成物。
    A polymer containing a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group protected by an acid degradable group,
    Photo acid generator, and
    A photosensitive resin composition comprising: a latent dye having a pKa of less than 4.5 of a conjugated acid or a compound which does not form a conjugated acid and having a maximum absorption wavelength of 500 nm or more in a wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at color development.
  2.  前記潜在性色素における前記極大吸収波長が、550nm以上である請求項1に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein the maximum absorption wavelength of the latent dye is 550 nm or more.
  3.  前記潜在性色素が、前記光酸発生剤から発生する酸により発色する潜在性色素である請求項1又は請求項2に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the latent dye is a latent dye that develops a color by an acid generated from the photoacid generator.
  4.  前記光酸発生剤から生じる酸が、リン酸及びスルホン酸よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の酸である請求項1~請求項3のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the acid generated from the photoacid generator is at least one acid selected from the group consisting of phosphoric acid and sulfonic acid.
  5.  前記光酸発生剤から発生する酸が、下記式S1又は式S2で表されるスルホン酸である請求項4に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

     式S1及び式S2中、Rは、アルキル基を表し、Lは、炭素数2以上のアルキレン基を表し、nsは0又は1を表し、ただし、Rがハロゲン原子を有するアルキル基である場合はnが1であり、Xはそれぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基又はアリーロキシ基を表し、msは、0~5の整数を表す。
    The photosensitive resin composition according to claim 4, wherein the acid generated from the photoacid generator is a sulfonic acid represented by the following formula S1 or S2.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    In formulas S1 and S2, R S represents an alkyl group, L S represents an alkylene group having 2 or more carbon atoms, ns represents 0 or 1, provided that R S is an alkyl group having a halogen atom in some cases an n is 1, X S are each independently, represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group, ms represents an integer of 0-5.
  6.  前記光酸発生剤から発生する酸のpKaが、-4.0以上である請求項1~請求項5のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator is -4.0 or more.
  7.  前記光酸発生剤から発生する酸のpKaが、4.0以下である請求項1~請求項6のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator is 4.0 or less.
  8.  塩基性化合物を更に含有する請求項1~請求項7のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7, further comprising a basic compound.
  9.  溶剤を更に含有する請求項1~請求項8のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8, further comprising a solvent.
  10.  前記潜在性色素が、下記式Iで表される化合物である請求項1~請求項9のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

     式I中、Ar1C及びAr2Cはそれぞれ独立に、芳香族基を表し、XはC、S又はS=Oを表し、R1C~R4Cはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子又は一価の有機基を表す。
    The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the latent dye is a compound represented by the following formula I.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

    In Formula I, Ar 1C and Ar 2C each independently represent an aromatic group, X C represents C, S or S = O, and R 1C to R 4C each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or one Represents a valent organic group.
  11.  前記式IにおけるXが、Cである請求項10に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive resin composition according to claim 10, wherein X C in the formula I is C.
  12.  前記カルボン酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位が、下記式IIで表される構成単位である請求項1~請求項11のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

     式II中、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR及びRのいずれか一方が、アルキル基又はアリール基であり、Rはアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R又はRと、Rとが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表す。
    The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the constituent unit having a group in which the carboxylic acid group is protected by an acid-degradable group is a constituent unit represented by the following formula II object.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

    In Formula II, R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 3 is an alkyl group Or R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X represents a single bond or an arylene group.
  13.  仮支持体と、
     感光性樹脂層とを有し、
     前記感光性樹脂層が、請求項1~請求項12のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物を含む
     感光性転写材料。
    A temporary support,
    And a photosensitive resin layer,
    A photosensitive transfer material, wherein the photosensitive resin layer comprises the photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 12.
  14.  基板に対し、請求項13に記載の感光性転写材料の前記感光性樹脂層を前記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記貼り合わせる工程後の前記感光性転写材料の前記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     前記露光する工程後の感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、
     前記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む
     回路配線の製造方法。
    A step of bringing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to claim 13 into contact with the substrate and bonding the substrate to the substrate;
    Pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the laminating step;
    Developing the photosensitive resin layer after the exposing step to form a pattern;
    And E. etching the substrate in the area where the pattern is not arranged.
  15.  基板に対し、請求項13に記載の感光性転写材料の前記感光性樹脂層を前記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記貼り合わせる工程後の前記感光性転写材料の前記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     前記露光する工程後の感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、
     前記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む
     タッチパネルの製造方法。
    A step of bringing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to claim 13 into contact with the substrate and bonding the substrate to the substrate;
    Pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the laminating step;
    Developing the photosensitive resin layer after the exposing step to form a pattern;
    And etching the substrate in the area where the pattern is not arranged.
PCT/JP2018/020842 2017-07-28 2018-05-30 Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method WO2019021622A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201880049839.0A CN110998441A (en) 2017-07-28 2018-05-30 Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel
JP2019532411A JP6808045B2 (en) 2017-07-28 2018-05-30 Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017147150 2017-07-28
JP2017-147150 2017-07-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019021622A1 true WO2019021622A1 (en) 2019-01-31

Family

ID=65040500

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/020842 WO2019021622A1 (en) 2017-07-28 2018-05-30 Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6808045B2 (en)
CN (1) CN110998441A (en)
TW (1) TW201910916A (en)
WO (1) WO2019021622A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114207525A (en) * 2019-08-02 2022-03-18 富士胶片株式会社 Photosensitive transfer member, method for manufacturing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000284473A (en) * 1999-03-31 2000-10-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Acid generating composition
JP2002240441A (en) * 2000-12-15 2002-08-28 Hayashibara Biochem Lab Inc Image presenting material
JP2004326094A (en) * 2003-04-07 2004-11-18 Toray Ind Inc Photosensitive resin composition
JP2004361557A (en) * 2003-06-03 2004-12-24 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Recording material
JP2006220863A (en) * 2005-02-09 2006-08-24 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Pattern formation material, pattern formation apparatus and pattern formation method
JP2006292957A (en) * 2005-04-08 2006-10-26 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Image forming material
JP2008122501A (en) * 2006-11-09 2008-05-29 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Positive type radiation-sensitive resin composition
JP2010237310A (en) * 2009-03-30 2010-10-21 Jsr Corp Radiosensitive resin composition, partition for organic el display element, insulating film, and forming method thereof

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3731356B2 (en) * 1997-08-13 2006-01-05 三菱化学株式会社 Positive photosensitive composition, photosensitive lithographic printing plate and method for forming positive image
KR20110031089A (en) * 2009-09-18 2011-03-24 제이에스알 가부시끼가이샤 Radiation-sensitive resin composition for forming a cured product such as protective film for display device, insulating film or spacer, the cured product, and process for forming the cured product
JP2017078852A (en) * 2015-10-21 2017-04-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Dry film resist, method for producing circuit wiring, circuit wiring, input device and display device
JP6573545B2 (en) * 2015-12-21 2019-09-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Positive photosensitive transfer material and method of manufacturing circuit wiring

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000284473A (en) * 1999-03-31 2000-10-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Acid generating composition
JP2002240441A (en) * 2000-12-15 2002-08-28 Hayashibara Biochem Lab Inc Image presenting material
JP2004326094A (en) * 2003-04-07 2004-11-18 Toray Ind Inc Photosensitive resin composition
JP2004361557A (en) * 2003-06-03 2004-12-24 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Recording material
JP2006220863A (en) * 2005-02-09 2006-08-24 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Pattern formation material, pattern formation apparatus and pattern formation method
JP2006292957A (en) * 2005-04-08 2006-10-26 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Image forming material
JP2008122501A (en) * 2006-11-09 2008-05-29 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Positive type radiation-sensitive resin composition
JP2010237310A (en) * 2009-03-30 2010-10-21 Jsr Corp Radiosensitive resin composition, partition for organic el display element, insulating film, and forming method thereof

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114207525A (en) * 2019-08-02 2022-03-18 富士胶片株式会社 Photosensitive transfer member, method for manufacturing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP6808045B2 (en) 2021-01-06
CN110998441A (en) 2020-04-10
JPWO2019021622A1 (en) 2020-05-28
TW201910916A (en) 2019-03-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6683890B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
KR102110818B1 (en) Method for manufacturing a substrate on which a pattern is formed, and method for manufacturing a circuit board
JP6573545B2 (en) Positive photosensitive transfer material and method of manufacturing circuit wiring
JP2018169543A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and method of manufacturing circuit wiring
WO2019102771A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, and method for producing wiring line
JP6502284B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material and method of manufacturing circuit wiring
JP6995865B2 (en) Manufacturing method of photosensitive transfer material and manufacturing method of circuit wiring
JP2018031847A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and method for producing circuit wiring
JP6992097B2 (en) Resist pattern manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6821046B2 (en) Circuit wiring manufacturing method and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6893550B2 (en) Manufacturing method of photosensitive transfer material and circuit wiring
JP6812556B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6685461B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP6832899B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6808045B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6995873B2 (en) Circuit board manufacturing method and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6685460B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP2018177889A (en) Manufacturing method of polymer solution for photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method of composition for photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method of photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method of circuit wiring, and manufacturing method of touch panel
WO2019225363A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18837495

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019532411

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18837495

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1